path: root/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/edmac/edmac.doc

%  \iffalse     This is a METACOMMENT
%
%     Macro file `EDMAC' for use with Plain TeX.
%
%     Copyright (C) 1990-1996 John Lavagnino and Dominik Wujastyk.
%
%     This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
%     it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
%     the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
%     (at your option) any later version.
%
%     This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
%     but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
%     MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
%     GNU General Public License for more details.
%
%     You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
%     along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
%     Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
%
%     John Lavagnino and Dominik Wujastyk may be contacted at the email
%     and paper mail addresses given later in this file, after the
%     string "\author".
% \fi
%
% \CheckSum{3106}
{\catcode`\$=9
\gdef\fileversion{ $Revision:   3.17  $ }
\gdef\filedate{ $Date:   12 Jun 1996 17:15:00  $ }}
\def\docdate{12 June 1996}
% \hyphenation{man-u-script man-u-scripts}
%
%% \CharacterTable
%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
%%
%
% \title{Critical Edition Typesetting\\ The {\tt EDMAC} format for
% P{\small LAIN}\,\TeX\thanks{This file is\fileversion\unskip,
% \filedate\unskip.}}
%
% \author{John Lavagnino\thanks{%
% Women Writers Project,
% Brown University,
% Box 1841,
% Providence, RI 02912, USA.
% Internet: {\tt John\_Lavagnino@brown.edu}.}
% \and Dominik Wujastyk\thanks{%
% Wellcome Institute for the History of Medicine,
% 183 Euston Road,
% London NW1 2BE, UK.
% Internet: {\tt D.Wujastyk@ucl.ac.uk}.}}
% \date{}
% \DoNotIndex{\@,\@@par,\@beginparpenalty,\@empty}
% \DoNotIndex{\@flushglue,\@input}
% \DoNotIndex{\@makefnmark,\@makeother,\@maketitle}
% \DoNotIndex{\@namedef,\@ne,\@spaces,\@tempa}
% \DoNotIndex{\@tempb,\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue}
% \DoNotIndex{\@thanks,\@thefnmark,\@topnum}
% \DoNotIndex{\@@,\@elt,\@forloop,\@fortmp,\@gtempa,\@totalleftmargin}
% \DoNotIndex{\",\/,\@ifundefined,\@nil,\@verbatim,\@vobeyspaces}
% \DoNotIndex{\|,\~,\ ,\active,\advance,\aftergroup,\begingroup,\bgroup}
% \DoNotIndex{\mathcal,\csname,\def,\documentstyle,\dospecials,\edef}
% \DoNotIndex{\egroup}
% \DoNotIndex{\else,\endcsname,\endgroup,\endinput,\endtrivlist}
% \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\fi,\fnsymbol,\futurelet,\gdef,\global}
% \DoNotIndex{\hbox,\hss,\if,\if@inlabel,\if@tempswa,\if@twocolumn}
% \DoNotIndex{\ifcase}
% \DoNotIndex{\ifcat,\iffalse,\ifx,\ignorespaces,\index,\input,\item}
% \DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\leftskip,\let,\llap,\lower}
% \DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\next,\newpage,\nobreak,\noexpand,\nonfrenchspacing}
% \DoNotIndex{\obeylines,\or,\protect,\raggedleft,\rightskip,\rm,\sc}
% \DoNotIndex{\setbox,\setcounter,\small,\space,\string,\strut}
% \DoNotIndex{\strutbox}
% \DoNotIndex{\thefootnote,\thispagestyle,\topmargin,\trivlist,\tt}
% \DoNotIndex{\twocolumn,\typeout,\vss,\vtop,\xdef,\z@}
% \DoNotIndex{\,,\@bsphack,\@esphack,\@noligs,\@vobeyspaces,\@xverbatim}
% \DoNotIndex{\`,\catcode,\end,\escapechar,\frenchspacing,\glossary}
% \DoNotIndex{\hangindent,\hfil,\hfill,\hskip,\hspace,\ht,\it,\langle}
% \DoNotIndex{\leaders,\long,\makelabel,\marginpar,\markboth,\mathcode}
% \DoNotIndex{\mathsurround,\mbox,\newcount,\newdimen,\newskip}
% \DoNotIndex{\nopagebreak}
% \DoNotIndex{\parfillskip,\parindent,\parskip,\penalty,\raise,\rangle}
% \DoNotIndex{\section,\setlength,\TeX,\topsep,\underline,\unskip,\verb}
% \DoNotIndex{\vskip,\vspace,\widetilde,\\,\%,\@date,\@defpar}
% \DoNotIndex{\[,\{,\},\]}
% \DoNotIndex{\count@,\ifnum,\loop,\today,\uppercase,\uccode}
% \DoNotIndex{\baselineskip,\begin,\tw@}
% \DoNotIndex{\a,\b,\c,\d,\e,\f,\g,\h,\i,\j,\k,\l,\m,\n,\o,\p,\q}
% \DoNotIndex{\r,\s,\t,\u,\v,\w,\x,\y,\z,\A,\B,\C,\D,\E,\F,\G,\H}
% \DoNotIndex{\I,\J,\K,\L,\M,\N,\O,\P,\Q,\R,\S,\T,\U,\V,\W,\X,\Y,\Z}
% \DoNotIndex{\1,\2,\3,\4,\5,\6,\7,\8,\9,\0}
% \DoNotIndex{\!,\#,\$,\&,\',\(,\),\+,\.,\:,\;,\<,\=,\>,\?,\_}
% \DoNotIndex{\discretionary,\immediate,\makeatletter,\makeatother}
% \DoNotIndex{\meaning,\newenvironment,\par,\relax,\renewenvironment}
% \DoNotIndex{\repeat,\scriptsize,\selectfont,\the,\undefined}
% \DoNotIndex{\arabic,\do,\makeindex,\null,\number,\show,\write,\@ehc}
% \DoNotIndex{\@author,\@ehc,\@ifstar,\@sanitize,\@title,\everypar}
% \DoNotIndex{\if@minipage,\if@restonecol,\ifeof,\ifmmode}
% \DoNotIndex{\lccode,\newtoks,\onecolumn,\openin,\p@,\SelfDocumenting}
% \DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\@resetonecoltrue,\@resetonecolfalse,\bf}
% \DoNotIndex{\clearpage,\closein,\lowercase,\@inlabelfalse}
% \DoNotIndex{\selectfont,\mathcode,\newmathalphabet,\rmdefault}
% \DoNotIndex{\bfdefault}
%
%  \iffalse     This is a METACOMMENT
%           Everything up to the next `\ fi' (without a blank) will
%           be ignored. This is necessary because `%' may no longer
%           be a comment mark when this file is read in.
%
%  HISTORY:
%
% $Log:   D:/EDMAC/VCS/EDMAC.DOV  $
% 
%    Rev 3.17   12 Jun 1996 17:15:00
% o  changed JL's and TUG's addresses;
% o  updated publication details of works produced with EDMAC;
% o  tidied up a bad cross-reference, etc.
% o  added several ftp and http references
% o  added the GNU license; moved (C) statement to top of file;
%    made the banner displayed when EDMAC is run conform to the GPL.
% o  added reference to CET.
% 
%    Rev 3.16   19 Jul 1994 11:17:04
% o  corrected space bug in \getref@num (thanks to Bernt Karasch);
%    changed documentation of how to use NFSS to point to an external
%    description ed-nfss.tex.
% 
%    Rev 3.15   13 May 1994 18:03:44
% o  added more comment to \morenoexpands;
% o  added example of \printlines after Sanskrit example;
% o  added more info on editions being done with EDMAC;
% o  minor tidying.
% 
%    Rev 3.14   11 May 1994 15:03:04
% o  removed a spurious space from \@lab; corrected a typo in docs.
% 
%    Rev 3.13   11 May 1994 14:01:28
% o   defined \list@clear and \list@create separately;
% o   swapped the subsections on fonts back, so NFSS is described first;
% o   rephrased all sentences with the word "default" to avoid its use.
% 
%    Rev 3.12   11 May 1994 12:03:10
% o  capitalized the footnote and endnote series letters: a-e > A-E.
% 
%    Rev 3.11   10 May 1994 15:19:54
% o  removed the optional braces from the second argument of \text
%    in the examples, and altered the documentation to match.
% 
%    Rev 3.10   10 May 1994 14:31:30
% o  changes to documentation;
% o  made \list@create same as \list@clear;
% o  added \f@encoding and \fontencoding;
% o  corrected \getref@num and \label@parse;
% o  brought the appendix examples more up to date and checked them;
% o  added more cross-references;
% o  added \selectfont to the end of NFSS-\select@@lemmafont.
%
%    Rev 3.9   03 May 1994 11:42:36
% o  Full incorporation of edmacfss.doc. Appropriate changes in
%    documentation. New \morenoexpands macro. New \list@create
%    and \list@clear in anticipation of faster list handling.
%    Numerous running changes.
% 
%    Rev 3.8   14 Apr 1994 12:02:22
% o  revised the cross-referencing macros, which weren't working.
%
%    Rev 3.7   31 Aug 1993 15:57:20
% o  Further changes in response to reviewer's observations. Correct
%    explanation of recursion problem with (some) aliases for \text.
%    Changed several more {\tt ...} strings to "..."; added some
%    \mbox{}s for italic in mathmode (wanted by NFSS2).
%
%    Rev 3.6   27 Aug 1993 16:50:42
% o  made changes as recommended in the TUG publication reviewer's report.
%    Mostly changes to docs; added \edmac@warning.
% o  Added a paragraph to Known Bugs highlighting problem of line breaking
%    in paragraphed footnotes.
%
%    Rev 3.5   23 Mar 1993 15:03:34
% o  added the corrections spotted by Gyula Mayer: some word duplications
%    and important changes to slhh.tex to make it compatible with the
%    current level of edmac.
%
%    Rev 3.4   12 Mar 1993 13:47:32
% o  added appendix material: inclusion of EDMACFSS.DOC and
%    example page of Arabic from Klaus Lagally.
% o  cosmetic changes to some \index entries, and removal of
%    some unnecessary \Make/DeleteShortVerb statements.
%
%    Rev 3.3   11 Mar 1993 12:56:34
% o  John's formatting revisions:
%    Fold long code lines so they don't overrun the measure.
%    Subsubsections changed to paragraphs.
%
%    Rev 3.2   26 Feb 1993 17:55:12
% o  correction to def'n of \@adv: spotted by Klaus Lagally.
%
%    Rev 3.1   25 Feb 1993 15:15:00
% o  small changes to documentation.
%
%    Rev 3.1   25 Feb 1993 12:17:12
% o  small changes to documentation.
%
%    Rev 3.0   25 Jun 1992 12:38:00
%    No change.
%
%    Rev 2.25   25 Jun 1992 12:29:20
% o  cosmetic changes to examples and \ipn@skip use.
%
%    Rev 2.24   22 Jun 1992 13:33:12
% o  cosmetic corrections.
%
%    Rev 2.23   22 Jun 1992 11:22:52
% o  changed \interparanoteglue to calculate its value once and
%    stick it into a skip register, instead of evaluating afresh
%    in each footnote.
%
%    Rev 2.22   19 Jun 1992 23:25:42
% o  added refreshed versions of arden.sty and features.tex; upgraded
%    the fonts section to a \subsection.
%
%    Rev 2.21   19 Jun 1992 21:07:46
% o  numerous small changes by JL; \ifnumbering@ now becomes
%    \ifnumbering since users may want access to it.
%
%    Rev 2.20   29 May 1992 13:04:26
% o  correction to ballast.
% o  brought "New to TeX?" section back into the document by default.
%
%    Rev 2.19   26 May 1992 16:14:34
% o  tidied up the \rightskip and \leftskip code in the footstart
%    and vfootnote macros for the different kinds of notes, and
%    documented it (these skips are now zeroed in the vfootnote
%    code, not in footfmt);  small corrections to docs.
%
%    Rev 2.18   22 May 1992 17:35:02
% o  further revisions to the paragraph footnote code and documentation;
%    inserted the \ballast macros.
%
%    Rev 2.17   18 May 1992 13:32:04
% o  more changes to the para-footnote code.  Added @ to para@footgroup
%    and para@vfootnote, since I would not expect these to be easily
%    modified; managed to get para@footgroup back to pre-2.16 code,
%    i.e., as in TeXbook, with just an added \unpenalty; changed
%    \parafootfmt's parfillskip to put proper \interparanoteglue glue
%    between notes; used Michael Downes's \unvxh in para@vfootnote.
%
%    Rev 2.16   08 May 1992 21:12:12
% o  applied several suggestions based on Wayne Sullivan's change
%    file of 27 April 1992.  These included changing \normal@pars
%    to include resetting leftskip and rightskip to zero, and
%    setting \parfillskip to normal; changed \paravfootnote
%    to put the paragraphed footnotes into a \vbox rather
%    than an \hbox (reasons explained in the documentation);
%    changed \parafootgroup quite substantially in order to get
%    the para notes properly unboxed; cosmetic changes to
%    \@add and \everypar; added the macro \edfont@info to make
%    things simpler in edmacfss.doc;
% o  began to write in the \ballast macros.
%
%    Rev 2.15   16 Apr 1992 17:16:52
% o  corrected minor spelling errors
%
%    Rev 2.14   09 Dec 1991 16:56:46
% o  revision of \splitoff to get column vspacing right.
% o  more tidying of documentation and examples.
%
%    Rev 2.13   05 Dec 1991 15:24:48
% o  changed \off@autopar to \normal@pars; changed \verb"xxx" to
%    just "xxx" globally, and put \MakeShortVerb{"} into the
%    driver file, edmacdoc.tex (this change requires the newdoc.sty
%    file, which supplements the doc.sty file);  stripped out the
%    examples in the appendix, and put in new ones, tailored to fit
%    the changes in edmac.doc (removal of verbose definitions of
%    \eightpoint, etc.); changed \two- and \threecolfootgroup to
%    reduce the amount of boxing and reboxing of the footnote insertions
%    done in the output routine (not wholly sure about this); added
%    the periph4.tex file in the appendix (don't know how it got left
%    out in previous versions); small changes to columnar footnote
%    macros, and generally to the documentation.
%
%    Rev 2.12   04 Dec 1991 17:13:22
% o  added Wayne Sullivan's new cross referencing macros.
%
%    Rev 2.11   03 Dec 1991 10:17:48
% o  have added \eightpoint, and \notefontsetup; more work on
%    documentation of fonts, mentioned edmacfss.doc; put calls to
%    \notefontsetup into footnote macros, so default is now to
%    small notes; took out the separate \twocol@foottopskip etc.
%    macros, and put \notefontsetup in the right place to govern
%    \ht\footstrut.
%
%    Rev 2.9   15 Nov 1991 17:46:06
% o  more macro name revisions; the bigee was \m@j -> \@l.  All
%    list macros are now called ...@list.  Modified \beginnumbering
%    to zero counters before reading the file, and took the zeroing
%    out of \readlinelist.  Then added \pausenumbering and
%    \resumenumbering.  More documentation.  Added \endashchar,
%    \fullstop, \rbracket, and put \rbracket after the lemma in all
%    footnote commands (a better default, I think).
%
%    Rev 2.8   12 Nov 1991 16:06:56
% o  major overhaul of macro names (w@rdw@rd -> word@word, etc.);
%    changed references to \count0 and \count255 (\count@) to
%    \@tempcntb and \@tempcnta;  Changed the bitwise stuff in
%    \printlines to be done with new scratch counters.
%
%    Rev 2.7   26 Aug 1991 18:06:10
% o  addition of line-number locking features.
% o  \global added to a few instances of \noteschanged@true.
% o  \@lnmoutstatus replaced by \first@lnmout@true and associated
%    macros.
%
%    Rev 2.6   25 Jul 1991 11:27:52
% o  inserted new arden.sty and arden.tex (1 May 1991)
% o  altered the \rigidbalance definition to do away with spaces
%    in the arguments.
% o  added the \twocol@splittopskip and \threecol@splittopskip
%    dimensions to correct the vertical alignment in columnar
%    footnotes (reported by Paul Wackers).
%
%    Rev 2.5   22 Apr 1991  9:11:40
% o  correction by W. Sullivan to addpenalties, avoiding use of \count0.
%
%    Rev 2.4   08 Feb 1991 16:43:16
% o  added a fix to \addpenalti@s provided by Wayne Sullivan
%
%    Rev 2.3   10 Jan 1991 20:47:34
% o  reduced the spacing around itemized lists.
%
%    Rev 2.2   11 Dec 1990 23:02:16
% o  added the "general features" and "Periphyseon" examples.
%
%    Rev 2.1   16 Oct 1990 15:35:42
% o  JL minor revisions to documentation, and editing of
%    the example files iocasta, gg, and arden.
%
%    Rev 2.0   03 Oct 1990 14:19:38
% No change.
%
%    Rev 1.26   03 Oct 1990 12:49:20
% o  Did away with \inputverbatim, and wrote the example files
%    into edmac.doc itself.  Added small amount of text to the Appendix.
%
%    Rev 1.24   25 Sep 1990 15:45:06
% o  made a new \parafootstart, moving the \rightskip etc. from
%    \parafootfmt.
%
%    Rev 1.23   25 Sep 1990 12:39:32
% o  Merged DW and JL changes; moved examples to \appendix; other
%    small changes to documentation.
%
%    Rev 1.21   19 Sep 1990 22:23:02
% o  DW changes to documentation; changed "n@" to "@num" when it
%    meant "number"; likewise rationalized and slightly shortened
%    other macros;  added parallel examples and picture of page.
%
%    Rev 1.20   14 Sep 1990 12:39:58
% o  JL near final revision of documentation.
%
%    Rev 1.18   22 Aug 1990 15:52:48
% o  revised crop mark code; small changes to documentation.
%
%    Rev 1.18   20 Aug 1990 16:39:38
% o  Revised crop mark code
%
%    Rev 1.17   20 Aug 1990 13:06:06
% o  Extensive changes in documentation.
% o  solved the \clubpenalty and \widowpenalty glitch
%
%    Rev 1.16   13 Aug 1990
% o  \ignorespaces in \text and associated macros, to skip over any
%    stray spaces within #2.
% o  Crop marks, \autopar.
% o  More sensible error messages.
%
%    Rev 1.15   03 Aug 1990 14:41:06
% o  Added two- and three- column footnotes.
% o  Corrected minor bugs in \parafootsetup and \parafootfmt.
%
%    Rev 1.14   01 Aug 1990 17:58:08
% o  Added \label, \pageref, \lineref and \sublineref cross-referencing
%    commands and documentation.  Small changes to documentation.
%
%    Rev 1.13   27 Jul 1990 10:46:30
% o  Major revision by JL. (for earlier history log, see rev. 1.12)
%
% \fi
%
% \maketitle
%
% \iffalse           % We're dropping the abstract for the book version.
% \begin{abstract}
% {\tt EDMAC} is a set of \PlainTeX\ macros providing the
% ability to format critical editions of texts in the traditional
% way, i.e., similar to the Oxford Classical Texts, Teubner, Arden
% Shakespeare and other series. The principal functions that are
% added are marginal line numbering and multiple series of
% footnotes and endnotes keyed to line numbers. While {\tt EDMAC}'s
% inner workings are necessarily esoteric, it seeks to provide
% relatively simple macros to enable you to control the exact
% format of the edition, taking into account the need to vary the
% format for different sorts of texts.
% \end{abstract}
% \fi
%
% ^^A \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\begin{multicols}{2}}
%
% {\parskip 0pt                ^^A We have to reset \parskip
%                              ^^A (bug in \LaTeX)
% \tableofcontents
% }
%
%
% \section{Introduction}
% \subsection{Overview}
%
% The "EDMAC" macros, together with \TeX, provide several
% important facilities for formatting critical editions of texts in
% a traditional manner. Major features include:
% \begin{itemize}\addtolength{\itemsep}{-1ex}
% \item automatic stepped line numbering, by page or by chapter;
% \item sub-lineation within the main series of line numbers;
% \item variant readings automatically keyed to line numbers;
% \item multiple series of footnotes and endnotes;
% \item block or columnar formatting of footnotes.
% \end{itemize}
%
% "EDMAC" allows the scholar engaged in preparing a critical
% edition to focus attention wholly on the task of creating the
% critical text and evaluating the variant readings, text-critical
% notes and testimonia. \TeX{} and "EDMAC" will take care of
% the formatting and visual correlation of all the disparate types
% of information.
%
% "EDMAC" works together with the \PlainTeX{} format, and with
% the exception of footnote-related commands, virtually all plain
% \TeX{} commands are available for use in the normal way. Other
% languages and fonts (Sanskrit, Greek, Russian,
% etc.),\footnote{See, e.g., {\em TUGboat\/} {\bf 9} (1988),
% pp.\,131--151.} can be incorporated.
%
% While "EDMAC" can be used ``out of the box'', with little or
% no customization, you may also go to the other extreme and view
% it as a collection of tools.  Critical editions are amongst the
% most idiosyncratic of books (like their authors), so we have made
% "EDMAC" deliberately bland in some ways, while also trying to
% document it reasonably well so that you can find out how to make
% it do what you want.
%
% This documentation assumes the ``manual'' use of "EDMAC". But
% "EDMAC" has also successfully been used (with \TeX, of
% course) as the formatting engine or ``back end'' for the output
% of an automatic manuscript collation program. "COLLATE" runs
% on the Apple Macintosh, can collate simultaneously up to a
% hundred manuscripts of any length, and provides facilities for
% the scholar to tailor the collation
% interactively.\footnote{"COLLATE" was created by Peter
% Robinson\protect\index{Robinson, Peter} at The Computers and
% Variant Texts Project, Oxford University Computing Service, 13 Banbury
% Road, Oxford OX2 6NN, England. Email: "peterr@vax.oxford.ac.uk".
% See "<URL http://www.shef.ac.uk/uni/projects/ctp/Main/collate.html>".}
%
% Another package which mediates between you as editor and the raw "EDMAC"
% codes is Bernt Karasch's ``Critical Edition Typesetter'' (CET).
% CET\label{CET}\index{Karasch, Bernt}
% provides a menu-driven front end for "EDMAC" and the other programs
% connected with \TeX.  CET does not do any collation: you still have to
% type the edition and the apparatus yourself.\footnote{For more details,
% see "<URL http://s.top.ruhr-uni-bochum.de/cet.htm>".}
%
% This book contains a general description of how to use "EDMAC"
% (in section~\ref{howto}); the complete source code for the package,
% with extensive documentation (in sections~\ref{overview}
% through \ref{end}); a series of examples (in
% Appendix~\ref{examples}); and an Index to the
% source code (in Appendix~B). We do not suggest that you need to
% read the source code for this package in order to use it; we
% provide this code primarily for reference, and many of our
% comments on it repeat material that is also found in
% section~\ref{howto}. But no documentation, however
% thorough, can cover every question that comes up, and many can be
% answered quickly by consultation of the code. On a first reading,
% then, you should skip from the general documentation of
% section~\ref{howto} to the examples in Appendix~\ref{examples},
% unless you are particularly interested in the innards of "EDMAC".
%
% \subsubsection{Availability}
%
% The "EDMAC" macros are available from CTAN, the Comprehensive \TeX\
% Archive Network.\footnote{See "<URL http://jasper.ora.com/ctan.html/>".}
% And "EDMAC" has it's own home page on the world wide web: see
% "<URL http://www.ucl.ac.uk/~ucgadkw/edmac.html>".
%
% \subsection{History}
%
% The original version of "EDMAC" was "TEXTED.TEX", written
% by John Lavagnino in late 1987 and early 1988 for formatting
% critical editions of English plays.
%
% John passed these macros on to Dominik Wujastyk who, in
% September--October 1988, added the footnote paragraphing mechanism,
% margin swapping and other changes to suit his own purposes, making the
% style more like that traditionally used for classical texts in Latin and
% Greek (e.g., the Oxford Classical Texts series). He also wrote some
% extra documentation and sent the files out to several people. This
% version of the macros was the first to be called "EDMAC".
%
% The present version was developed in the summer of 1990, with the
% intent of adding necessary features, streamlining and documenting
% the code, and further generalizing it to make it easily adaptable
% to the needs of editors in different disciplines.  John did most
% of the general reworking and documentation, with the financial
% assistance of the Division of the Humanities and Social Sciences,
% California Institute of Technology.  Dominik adapted the code to
% the conventions of Frank Mittelbach's\index{Mittelbach, Frank}
% "doc" option, and added some documentation, multiple-column
% footnotes, cross-references, and crop marks.\footnote{This version of
% the macros was used to format the Sanskrit text in volume I of {\em
% Metarules of P\=a\d ninian Grammar\/} by Dominik Wujastyk (Groningen:
% Forsten, 1993).} A description by John and Dominik of this version of
% "EDMAC" was published as ``An overview of "EDMAC": a \PlainTeX\
% format for critical editions'', {\em TUGboat\/} {\bf 11} (1990),
% pp.\,623--643.
%
% From 1991 through 1994, the macros continued
% to evolve, and were tested at a
% number of sites.  We are very grateful to all the members of the
% (now defunct)
% "edmac@mailbase.ac.uk" discussion group who helped us with
% smoothing out bugs and infelicities in the macros.
% Ron Whitney\index{Whitney, Ron} and our anonymous reviewer at
% the TUG were both of great help in ironing out last-minute
% wrinkles, while Ron made some important suggestions which may help
% to make future versions of "EDMAC" even more efficient.
% Wayne
% Sullivan,\index{Sullivan, Wayne} in particular, provided several
% important fixes and contributions, including adapting the
% Mittelbach\slash
% Sch\"opf\index{Sch\"opf, Rainer}\index{Mittelbach, Frank} ``New
% Font Selection Scheme'' for use with \PlainTeX\ and "EDMAC" (see
% p.\,\pageref{edmacnfss} below).  Another project Wayne has worked
% on is a "DVI" post-processor which works with an "EDMAC"
% that has been slightly modified to output "\special"s.  This
% combination enables you to recover to some extent the text of
% each line, as {\sc ascii} code, facilitating the creation of
% concordances, an {\em index verborum}, etc.
%
% At the time of writing, we are pleased to be able to say that "EDMAC"
% is used for real-life book production.  Several interesting
% editions have appeared in print or are underway, such as
% the Latin texts of Euclid's {\sl
% Elements},\footnote{Gerhard Brey\index{Brey, Gerhard} used "EDMAC" in
% the production of Hubert L. L. Busard\index{Busard, Hubert L. L.} and
% Menso Folkerts,\index{Folkerts, Menso} {\em Robert of Chester's
% (?)\index{Chester, Robert of} Redaction of Euclid's\index{Euclid} {\em
% Elements}, the so-called Adelard II\index{Adelard II} Version}, 2 vols.,
% (Basel, Boston, Berlin: Birkh\"auser, 1992).} an edition of the letters
% of Nicolaus Copernicus,\footnote{Being prepared at the German Copernicus
% Research Institute, Munich, under the general editorship of Heribert
% M. Nobis\index{Nobis, Heribert M.} and Menso Folkerts\index{Folkerts,
% Menso}; volume 1 has appeared as {\em Documenta Copernicana: Briefe
% (Texte und \"{U}bersetzungen)}, edited by Andreas
% K\"{u}hne\index{Kuehne, Andreas}, et al. (Berlin: Akademie Verlag,
% 1994).}\index{Copernicus, Nicolaus} Simon
% Bredon's\index{Bredon, Simon} {\em Arithmetica},\footnote{Being prepared
% by Menso Folkerts {\em et al.}, at the Institut f\"ur Geschichte der
% Naturwissenschaften in Munich.} a Latin translation by Plato of
% Tivoli\index{Plato of Tivoli} of an Arabic astrolabe
% text,\footnote{Richard Lorch,\index{Lorch, Richard} Gerhard
% Brey\index{Brey, Gerhard}, Stefan Kirschner\index{Kirschner, Stefan},
% and Christoph Sch\"{o}ner\index{Schoener, Christoph},
% `Ibn-a\d{s}-\d{S}aff\={a}rs Traktat \"{u}ber das Astrolab in der
% \"{U}bersetzung von Plato von Tivoli,' in {\em Cosmographica et
% Geographica}, ed.\ Bernhard Fritscher\index{Fritscher, Bernhard} and
% Gerhard Brey\index{Brey, Gerhard}, (M\"{u}nchen: Instit\"{u}t f\"ur
% Geschichte der Naturwissenschaften, 1994), vol.\,1, pp.\,125--180.} a
% Latin
% translation of part II of the Arabic {\em Algebra\/} by Ab\=u K\=amil
% Shuj\=a' b. Aslam,\index{Abu Kamil Shuja' b. Aslam}\footnote{Richard
% Lorch, `Ab\=u K\=amil on the Pentagon and Decagon' in {\em Vestigia
% Mathematica}, ed.\ M. Folkerts\index{Folkerts, Menso} and J. P.
% Hogendijk\index{Hogendijk, J. P.} (Amsterdam, Atlanta:
% Rodopi, 1993).} the Latin {\em Rithmachia\/} of Werinher von
% Tegernsee,\footnote{Menso Folkerts, `Die {\em Rithmachia\/} des Werinher
% von Tegernsee', ibid.} a middle-Dutch romance epic on the
% Crusades,\footnote{Geert H. M. Claassens,\index{Claassens, Geert H. M.}
% {\em De Middelnederlandse Kruisvaartromans}, (Amsterdam: Schiphower en
% Brinkman, 1993).}
% Johann Widmann's German arithmetic of 1489,\footnote{{\em Behend vnd
% h\"upsch Rechnung vff allen Kauffmanschafften}, being prepared at the
% University of Heidelberg by Barbara G\"artner\index{Gaertner, Barbara}.}
% a seventeenth-century Hungarian politico-philosophical
% tract,\footnote{Emil Hargittay, {\em Cs\'aky Istv\'an: Politica
% philosophiai Okoskod\'as-szerint val\'o rendes \'eletnek p\'eld\'aja
% (1664--1674)\/} (Budapest: Argumentum Kiad\'o, 1992).} an anonymous
% Latin compilation of Christian sermons from Hungary\footnote{{\em
% Sermones Compilati in Studio Gererali Quinqeecclesiensi in Regno
% Ungarie}, ed.\ Eduardo Petrovich\index{Petrovich, Eduardo} and Paulus
% Ladislaus Timkovics\index{Timkovics, Paulus Ladislaus} (Budapest:
% Akad\'emiai Kiad\'o, 1993), typeset, as was the previous book, by Gyula
% Mayer\index{Mayer, Gyula}.} the collected letters and papers of
% Leibniz,\index{Leibniz}\footnote{Leibniz, {\em S\"amtliche Schriften und
% Briefe}, series {\sc I, III, VII,} being edited by Dr.\ H.
% Breger\index{Breger, Herbert} and Dr. N. G\"adeke\index{G\"adeke, Nora}
% at the Leibniz-Archiv, Nieders\"achsische Landesbibliothek, Hannover.}
% Theodosius's\index{Theodosius} {\em Spherics}, the German {\em
% Algorismus} of Sacrobosco,\index{Sacrobosco} the Sanskrit text of the
% {\em Skandapur\=a\d{na}},\footnote{Being prepared at the University of
% Groningen by Hans Bakker,\index{Bakker, Hans} Roelf
% Adriaensen,\index{Adriaensen, Roelf} and
% Harunaga Isaacson.\index{Isaacson, Harunaga}} and the English texts of
% Thomas Middleton's\index{Middleton, Thomas} collected
% works\footnote{{\em The Collected Works of Thomas Middleton}, Gary
% Taylor, general editor, and John Lavagnino, electronics editor (Oxford:
% Oxford University Press, forthcoming).}, as well as the editions by
% Wayne Sullivan\index{Sullivan, Wayne}, Mac Pigman\index{Pigman,
% III$^{rd}$, G. W.}, and Dominik Wujastyk\index{Wujastyk, Dominik} which
% are illustrated in Appendix~\ref{examples}.
%
% \subsection{New to \TeX?}
%
% If you are coming to "EDMAC" primarily as the editor of a
% text, but have not thought about using \TeX\ before, you should
% find someone to help you get started with the program.  It is not
% really hard, but there are some points where a bit of good advice
% might save you some time.  \TeX{} is available in versions that
% run on most computers, and many implementations of \TeX\ are
% available free, or at a very low cost.  The output of \TeX\ can
% be printed without change on most printers and phototypesetting
% machines.  \TeX\ produces very high quality typesetting, and is
% particularly strong in the areas of typesetting complex
% mathematical formulae and multilingual texts.
%
% The \TeX{} Users Group (TUG) can advise you on all matters
% related to \TeX. If you are not already a member of the group, it
% is well worth joining. One of the most useful things TUG will do
% for you initially is give you a membership list, so you can find
% out who your local \TeX\ guru is.  The address is:
% \begin{quote}
% \TeX{} Users Group,\\* 1850 Union Street, Suite 1637,\\*
% San Francisco, CA 94123\\* USA.\\* Email: "tug@tug.org"\\*
% Home page: "<URL http://www.tug.org/>".
% \end{quote}
%
% This document does not include a \TeX{} tutorial.
% Recent years have seen the publication of numerous excellent books on
% how to learn and use \TeX, and the main implementations of \TeX, such as
% em\TeX\ by Eberhard Mattes\index{Mattes, Eberhard}, come with first
% class documentation. In brief, when
% you use "EDMAC" the main text to be edited is typed into a
% computer file as a plain text, with blank lines marking paragraph
% breaks, and with all formatting, accented characters, and other
% special requirements indicated by \TeX{} macros. {\em The \TeX
% book\/}\footnote{Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1984.} by
% Donald E.~Knuth gives guidelines on various formatting commands
% for headings, page size, etc., and is a necessary
% reference for users of "EDMAC".
%
%
% \section{How to use {\tt EDMAC}}\label{howto}
% \subsection{Introduction}
%
% A document that uses "EDMAC" will use many standard \TeX{}
% commands, along with special "EDMAC" commands. This chapter
% describes the usage of all the "EDMAC" commands; the name of
% each will be printed in the margin as it is introduced. We assume
% a basic familiarity with \TeX{} conventions; if you are not
% conversant with \TeX{}, you should be able to form an idea of
% the specific capabilities of "EDMAC" from this account, but
% (we repeat) you will not be able to use "EDMAC" without first
% learning some \TeX{}.
%
% All you need to do to invoke "EDMAC" is to include the line
% "\input EDMAC.DOC" at the top of your document, and to have the
% file "EDMAC.DOC" somewhere on your disk that is ``visible''
% to \TeX{} for input.  It takes only a few
% seconds for \TeX\ to read "EDMAC.DOC", but if you
% are going to use it frequently, as will certainly be the case if
% you are doing a real edition, you will find it convenient to
% compile it into a \TeX\ format file, loading it after
% "PLAIN.TEX" and any other private macros.
%
% "EDMAC" {\em is a three-pass system}, like
% \LaTeX.\footnote{Oh yes it is, if you have a table of contents,
% lists of figures, etc.} Although your textual apparatus and line
% numbers will be printed even on the first run, it takes two more
% passes through \TeX\ to be sure that everything gets to its right
% place. Any changes you make to the input file may similarly
% require three passes to get everything to the right place, if the
% changes alter the number of lines or notes. "EDMAC" will tell
% you that you need to make more runs, when it notices, but it does
% not expend the labor to check this thoroughly. If you have
% problems with a line or two misnumbered at the top of a page, try
% running \TeX{} once or twice more.
%
% A file may mix {\em numbered\/} and {\em unnumbered\/} text.
% Numbered text is printed with marginal line numbers and can include
% footnotes and endnotes that are referenced to those line numbers:
% this is how you'll want to print the text that you're editing.
% Unnumbered text is not printed with line numbers, and you can't
% use "EDMAC"'s note commands with it: this is appropriate for
% introductions and other material added by the editor around the
% edited text.
%
% \paragraph{The choice of editing program}
% The careful choice of a good text editing program can make the
% preparation of texts for "EDMAC" much easier.  In common with
% most \TeX\ documents, a file formatted with "EDMAC" macros
% will have many sets of braces, often nested, and often enclosing
% material that will end up at the bottom of the page as notes.
% Some word processors or editors have the ability to ``fold'' text
% out of sight. This means that on the computer screen a particular
% string or passage can be hidden, perhaps behind a symbol.  Most
% modern word-processors handle footnotes in this way.  When you want
% to type a note, a window opens up; you type the note, and the
% window closes, leaving a highlighted number to remind you that
% a note is there.  There are several  folding editors available
% commercially and in the public domain, which would allow you to
% see only the main text of your work on the computer screen, while
% the notes and variants, etc., would be hidden from view.\footnote{One
% cross-platform public domain folding editor is ``Andys Editor'' which is
% available from the well-known Hobbes Internet site,
% "<URL http://hobbes.nmsu.edu/os2/editors/>" as the file "ae.zip".}
% GNU "Emacs" has an "outline" mode which could probably be
% modified to work like this.  (It is important, of course, that
% the editor doesn't pepper your text with unwanted control codes,
% or that if it does, they can easily be removed.)
%
% Another helpful feature to look for in your editing program is
% syntax-highlighting.  This means that the editor displays \TeX\ codes in
% a different colour from the textual matter.  This is enormously helpful
% in keeping clear what is what: you eye easily sees opening and closing
% braces, text and note commands, etc.  One editor which combines this and
% other valuable features, as well as being available for most operating
% systems, is "JED", by John E. Davis.\footnote{JED's home page on the
% web is "<URL http://space.mit.edu/~davis/jed.html>".}
% The CET system mentioned above (p.\,\pageref{CET} uses a simplified set
% of tags for marking up the text, and includes a pre-processor which
% turns these into actual "EDMAC" markup.
%
% An editor or system like this can be extremely helpful in keeping your
% text in good order, and allowing you to concentrate on the edition.
%
% \subsection{General markup}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\beginnumbering}
% \DescribeMacro{\endnumbering}
% Each section of numbered text must be preceded by
% "\beginnumbering" and followed by "\endnumbering":
% \begin{samepage}
% \smallskip
%
% "\beginnumbering"
%
% $\langle${\em text\/}$\rangle$
%
% "\endnumbering"
% \end{samepage}
%
% The "\beginnumbering" macro resets the line number to zero,
% reads an auxiliary file called \meta{filename}"."\meta{nn} (where
% {\it filename\/} is the name of the main input file for this job,
% and {\it nn\/} is "1" for the first numbered section, "2" for
% the second section, and so on), and then creates a new version of
% this auxiliary file to collect information during this run. The
% first instance of "\beginnumbering" also opens a file called
% \meta{filename}".end" to receive the text of the endnotes.
% "\endnumbering" closes the \meta{filename}"."\meta{nn} file.
%
% If the line numbering of a text is to be continuous from start to end,
% then the whole text will be typed between one pair of
% "\beginnumbering" and "\endnumbering" commands. But your text
% will most often contain chapter or other divisions marking sections
% that should be independently numbered, and these will be appropriate
% places to begin new numbered sections. "EDMAC" has to read and store
% in memory
% a certain amount of information about the entire section when it
% encounters a "\beginnumbering" command, so it speeds up the
% processing and reduces memory use when a text is divided into a larger
% number of sections (at the expense of multiplying the number of
% external files that are generated).
%
% \DescribeMacro{\pstart}
% \DescribeMacro{\pend}
% Within a numbered section, each paragraph of numbered text must
% be marked using the "\pstart" and "\pend" commands:
% \begin{samepage}
% \smallskip
%
% "\pstart"
%
% $\langle${\em paragraph of text\/}$\rangle$
%
% "\pend"
%
% \end{samepage}
%
% Text that appears within a numbered section but isn't marked with
% "\pstart" and "\pend" will not be numbered.
%
% The following example shows the proper section and paragraph
% markup, and the kind of output that would typically be generated:
% \egstart
% \begin{verbatim}
% \beginnumbering
% \pstart
% This is a sample paragraph, with
% lines numbered automatically.
% \pend
%
% \pstart
% This paragraph too has its
% lines automatically numbered.
% \pend
%
% The lines of this paragraph are
% not numbered.
%
% \pstart
% And here the numbering begins
% again.
% \pend
% \endnumbering
% \end{verbatim}
% \egmid
% {\parskip0pt \count255=0
% \everypar={\advance \count255 by 1 \hbox to 1.5em{\the\count255\hfil}}
% This is a sample paragraph\par
% with lines numbered\par
% automatically.\smallskip
%
% This paragraph too\par
% has its lines automatically\par
% numbered.\smallskip
%
% \everypar={\hbox to 1.5em{\hfil}}
% The lines of this paragraph\par
% are not numbered.\smallskip
%
% \everypar={\advance \count255 by 1 \hbox to 1.5em{\the\count255\hfil}}
% And here the numbering\par
% begins again.\par}
% \egend
%
% \DescribeMacro{\autopar}
% You can use "\autopar" to avoid the nuisance of this paragraph markup
% and still have every paragraph automatically numbered.  The scope of the
% "\autopar" command needs to be limited by keeping it within a group, as
% follows:
% \egstart
% \begin{verbatim}
% \begingroup
%   \beginnumbering
%   \autopar
%
%   A paragraph of numbered text.
%
%   Another paragraph of numbered
%   text.
%
%   \endnumbering
% \endgroup
% \end{verbatim}
% \egmid
% {\parskip0pt \count255=0
% \everypar={\advance \count255 by 1 \hbox to 1.5em{\the\count255\hfil}}
% A paragraph of numbered\par
% text.\smallskip
%
% Another paragraph of\par
% numbered text.\par}
% \egend
% "\autopar" fails, however, on paragraphs that start with a
% "{" or with any other command that starts a new group before it
% generates any text. Such paragraphs need to be started explicitly,
% before the new group is opened,
% using "\indent", "\noindent", or "\leavevmode", or using
% "\pstart" itself.\footnote{For a detailed study of the
% reasons for this restriction, see Barbara Beeton, ``Initiation
% rites'', {\em TUGboat\/} {\bf 12} (1991),
% pp.\,257--258.\protect\index{Beeton, Barbara Ann Neuhaus Friend}}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\pausenumbering}
% \DescribeMacro{\resumenumbering}
% \label{pause}\relax
% "EDMAC" stores a lot of information about line numbers and
% footnotes in memory as it goes through a numbered section.  But
% at the end of such a section, it empties its memory out, so to
% speak.  If your text has a very long numbered section it is
% possible that your \TeX\ may reach its memory limit.  There are
% two solutions to this.  The first is to get a new \TeX\ with
% increased memory.  There are several Big\TeX\ implementations
% easily available today, both commercial and public-domain,
% depending on your operating system.  The second solution is to
% split your long section into several smaller ones.  The trouble
% with this is that your line numbering will start again at zero
% with each new section.  To avoid this problem, we provide
% "\pausenumbering" and "\resumenumbering" which are just
% like "\endnumbering" and "\beginnumbering", except that
% they arrange for your line numbering to continue across the break.
% Use "\pausenumbering" only between numbered paragraphs:
% \egstart
% \begin{verbatim}
% \beginnumbering
% \pstart
% Paragraph of text.
% \pend
% \pausenumbering
%
% \resumenumbering
% \pstart
% Another paragraph.
% \pend
% \endnumbering
% \bye
% \end{verbatim}
% \egmid
% {\parskip0pt \count255=0
% \everypar={\advance \count255 by 1 \hbox to 1.5em{\the\count255\hfil}}
% Paragraph of\par
% text.\medskip
%
% Another paragraph.\par}
%
% \egend
%
% We have
% defined these commands as two macros, in case you find it necessary
% to insert text between numbered sections without disturbing the
% line numbering.  But if you are really just using these macros to
% save memory, you might as well say
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\memorybreak{\pausenumbering\resumenumbering}
% \end{verbatim}
% and say "\memorybreak" between the relevant "\pend" and
% "\pstart".
%
%
%
% \subsection{The apparatus}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\text}
% Within numbered paragraphs, all footnotes and endnotes are generated
% by forms of the "\text" macro:
% \begin{verse}
% "\text{"\meta{lemma}"}"\meta{commands}"/"
% \end{verse}
%
% The \meta{lemma} argument is the lemma in the main text: "\text"
% both prints this as part of the text, and makes it available to the
% \meta{commands} you specify to generate notes. The "/" at the
% end terminates the command; it is part of the macro's definition so
% that spaces after the macro will be treated as significant.
%
% For example:
% \egstart
% \begin{verbatim}
% I saw my friend \text{Smith}
% \Afootnote{Jones C, D.}/
% on Tuesday.
% \end{verbatim}
% \egmid
% 1\enspace I saw my friend\\
% 2\enspace Smith on Tuesday.\smallskip
% \hrule width 1.5cm
% \strut {\bf 2} Smith] Jones C, D.
% \egend
%
% The lemma "Smith" is printed as part of this sentence in
% the text, and is also made available to the footnote
% that specifies a variant, "Jones C, D". The footnote macro
% is supplied with the line number at which the lemma appears
% in the main text.
%
% The \meta{lemma} may contain further "\text" commands; this is the
% other reason why "\text"'s arguments are terminated by "/".  Nesting makes
% it possible to print an explanatory note on a long passage together with
% notes on variants for individual words within the passage. For
% example:
% \egstart
% \begin{verbatim}
% \text{I saw my friend
%   \text{Smith}\Afootnote{Jones
%   C, D.}/ on Tuesday.}
%   \Bfootnote{The date was
%   July 16, 1954.}
% /
% \end{verbatim}
% \egmid
% 1\enspace I saw my friend\\
% 2\enspace Smith on Tuesday.\smallskip
% \hrule width 1.5cm
% \strut {\bf 2} Smith] Jones C, D.\smallskip
% \hrule width 1.5cm
% \strut {\bf 1--2} I saw my friend \\
% Smith on Tuesday.] The\\ date was
% July 16, 1954.
% \egend
%
% However, "\text" cannot handle overlapping but unnested
% notes---for example, one note covering lines 10--15, and another
% covering 12--18; a "\text" that starts in the \meta{lemma}
% argument of another "\text" must end there, too. (The
% "\lemma" and "\linenum" commands may be used to
% generate overlapping notes if necessary.)
%
% \paragraph{Commands used in {\tt\protect\bslash text}'s second argument}
%
% The second argument of the "\text" macro, \meta{commands},
% may contain a series of subsidiary commands that generate
% various kinds of notes.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\Afootnote}
% \DescribeMacro{\Bfootnote}
% \DescribeMacro{\Cfootnote}
% \DescribeMacro{\Dfootnote}
% \DescribeMacro{\Efootnote}
% Five separate series of footnotes are maintained; when all five
% are used, the "A" notes appear in a layer just below the main
% text, followed by the rest in turn, down to the "E" notes at
% the bottom.  These are the main macros that you will use to construct
% the critical apparatus of your text.  "EDMAC" provides five
% layers of notes in the belief that this will be adequate for
% the most demanding editions.  But it is not hard to add further
% layers of notes to "EDMAC" should they be required.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\Aendnote}
% \DescribeMacro{\Bendnote}
% \DescribeMacro{\Cendnote}
% \DescribeMacro{\Dendnote}
% \DescribeMacro{\Eendnote}
% "EDMAC" also maintains five separate series of endnotes.
% Normally, none of them is printed: you must use the
% "\doendnotes" macro described below
% (p.\,\pageref{doendnotes}) to call for their
% output at the appropriate point in your document.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\lemma}
% Sometimes you want to change the lemma that gets passed to the notes.
% You can do this by using "\lemma" within the second argument to
% "\text", before the note commands.
% \begin{verse}
% "\lemma{"\meta{alternative lemma}"}"
% \end{verse}
% The most common use of this command is to abbreviate the lemma that's
% printed in the notes. For example:
% \egstart
% \begin{verbatim}
% \text{I saw my friend
%   \text{Smith}\Afootnote{Jones
%   C, D.}/ on Tuesday.}
%   \lemma{I \dots\ Tuesday.}
%   \Bfootnote{The date was
%   July 16, 1954.}
% /
% \end{verbatim}
% \egmid
% 1\enspace I saw my friend\\
% 2\enspace Smith on Tuesday.\smallskip
% \hrule width 1.5cm
% \strut {\bf 2} Smith] Jones C, D.\smallskip
% \hrule width 1.5cm
% \strut {\bf 1--2} I \dots\ Tuesday.] \\
% The date was July 16, 1954.
% \egend
%
% \DescribeMacro{\linenum}
% \label{linenum}\relax
% You can use "\linenum" to change the line numbers passed to
% the notes. The notes are actually given seven parameters: the page,
% line, and sub-line number for the start of the lemma; the same
% three numbers for the end of the lemma; and the font specifier
% for the lemma. As argument to "\linenum", you specify
% those seven parameters in that order, separated by vertical bars
% (the "|" character). However, you can retain the value
% computed by "EDMAC" for any number by simply omitting it; and
% you can omit a sequence of vertical bars at the end of the
% argument.  For example, "\linenum{|||23}" changes one number,
% the ending page number of the current lemma.
%
% This command doesn't change the marginal line numbers in any way;
% it just changes the numbers passed to the footnotes. Its use comes in
% situations that "\text" has trouble dealing with for
% whatever reason. If you need notes for overlapping passages that
% aren't nested, for instance, you can use "\lemma" and
% "\linenum" to generate such notes despite the limitations of
% "\text".  If the \meta{lemma} argument to "\text" is
% extremely long, you may run out of memory; here again you can
% specify a note with an abbreviated lemma using "\lemma" and
% "\linenum". The numbers used in "\linenum" need not be
% entered manually; you can use the ``"x-"'' symbolic cross-referencing
% commands below (p.\,\pageref{crossref}) to compute them
% automatically.
%
% Similarly, being able to manually change the lemma's font specifier
% in the notes might be important if you were using multiple scripts or
% languages. The form of the font specifier depends on the font
% selection scheme you are using (see section~\ref{fonts} below).
% If you're using Plain, it is the
% ``font family'' number; if you're using NFSS, it is actually three
% separate codes separated by "/" characters, giving the family,
% series, and shape codes as defined within NFSS.
%
% \paragraph{Changing the names of these commands}
%
% The commands for generating the apparatus have been given
% rather bland names, because editors in different fields have
% widely divergent notions of what sort of notes are required, where
% they should be printed, and what they should be called. But this
% doesn't mean you have to type "\Afootnote" when you'd rather
% say something you find more meaningful, like "\variant". We
% recommend that you create a series of such aliases and use them
% instead of the names chosen here; all you have to do is put commands
% of this form at the start of your file:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \let\variant=\Afootnote
% \let\explanatory=\Bfootnote
% \let\trivial=\Aendnote
% \let\testimonia=\Cfootnote
% \end{verbatim}
%
% It is also possible to define aliases for "\text", which
% can be easier to type. You can make a single character substitute
% for "\text" by saying this:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \catcode`\<=\active
% \let<=\text
% \end{verbatim}
%
% Then you might say "<{Smith}\variant{Jones}/". This of course
% destroys the ability to use "<" in any new macro definitions, so
% long as it remains in effect; hence it should be used with care.
%
% Changing the character at the end of the command requires more work:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \catcode`\<=\active
% \def\xtext#1#2>{\text{#1}{#2}/}
% \let<=\xtext
% \end{verbatim}
% This allows you to say "<{Smith}\Afootnote{Jones}>".
%
% Aliases for "\text"
% of the first kind shown here also can't be nested---that is,
% you can't use the alias in the text that forms the first argument
% to "\text". (See section~\ref{text} to find out why.) Aliases of
% the second kind may be nested without any problem.
%
% \subsection{Lineation commands}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\lineation}
% "EDMAC" can number lines either by page or by section; you specify
% this using the "\lineation{"\meta{arg}"}"
% macro, where \meta{arg} is either
% "page" or "section". You may only use this command at places
% where numbering is not in effect; you can't change the lineation system
% within a section. You can change it between sections: they don't all
% have to use the same lineation system. The line-of-section system is
% "EDMAC"'s standard setting.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\linenummargin}
% The marginal line numbers will be printed in the "left",
% "right", "inner", or "outer" margin, depending on which you
% specify as argument to the "\linenummargin"
% command: for example, "\linenummargin{inner}".
% Normally, line numbers appear
% in the left margin. You can change this whenever you're not in the
% middle of making a paragraph.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\firstlinenum}
% \DescribeMacro{\linenumincrement}
% \DescribeMacro{\firstsublinenum}
% \DescribeMacro{\sublinenumincrement}
% In most cases, you will not want a number printed for every
% single line of the text. Four \TeX{} "count" registers control
% the printing of marginal numbers.
% "\firstlinenum" specifies the number of the first line in a
% section to number, and "\linenumincrement" is the increment
% between numbered lines. "\firstsublinenum" and
% "\sublinenumincrement" do the same for
% sub-lines.  Initially, all these counters are set equal to $5$.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\leftlinenum}
% \DescribeMacro{\rightlinenum}
% \DescribeMacro{\linenumsep}
% When a marginal line number is to be printed, there are a
% lot of ways to display it.
% You can redefine "\leftlinenum" and "\rightlinenum" to
% change the way marginal line numbers are printed in the
% left and right margins respectively; the initial
% versions print the number in font "\numlabfont" (described
% below) at a distance "\linenumsep" (initially set to one pica)
% from the text.
%
% \subsection{Changing the line numbers}
%
% Normally the line numbering starts at 1 for the first line of
% a section and steps up by one for each line thereafter. There
% are various common modifications of this system, however; the
% commands described here allow you to put such modifications
% into effect.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\startsub}
% \DescribeMacro{\endsub}
% You insert the "\startsub" and "\endsub" commands in your text
% to turn sub-lineation on and off. In plays, for
% example, stage directions are often numbered with sub-line
% numbers: as line $10.1$, $10.2$,
% $10.3$, rather than as $11$, $12$, and $13$.
% Titles and headings are sometimes numbered with sub-line numbers
% as well.
%
% When sub-lineation is in effect, the line number counter is
% frozen and the sub-line counter advances instead. If one of these
% commands appears in the middle of a line, it doesn't take effect
% until the next line; in other words, a line is counted as a line
% or sub-line depending on what it started out as, even if that
% changes in the middle.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\startlock}
% \DescribeMacro{\endlock}
% The "\startlock" command, used in running text, locks the
% line number at its current value, until you say "\endlock".
% It can tell for itself whether you are in a patch of line or
% sub-line numbering. One use for line-number locking is in printing
% poetry: there the line numbers should be those of verse lines
% rather than of printed lines, even when a verse line requires several
% printed lines.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\lockdisp}
% When line-number locking is used,
% several printed lines may have the same line number, and you have to
% specify whether you want the number attached to the first printed
% line or the last, or whether you just want the number printed by
% them all. (This assumes that, on the basis of the settings of
% the previous parameters, it is necessary to display a line number for
% this line.)  You specify your preference using "\lockdisp"; its
% argument is a word, either "first", "last", or "all".
% "EDMAC" initially sets this to "first".
%
% \DescribeMacro{\setline}
% \DescribeMacro{\advanceline}
% In some cases you may want to modify the line numbers that are
% automatically calculated: if you are printing only fragments
% of a work but want to print line numbers appropriate to a complete
% version, for example. The "\setline" and "\advanceline" commands
% may be used to change the current line's number (or the sub-line
% number, if sub-lineation is currently on). They change both the
% marginal line numbers and the line numbers passed to the notes.
% "\setline" takes one argument, the value to which you want
% the line number set; it must be $0$ or greater. "\advanceline"
% takes one argument, an amount that should be added to the current
% line number; it may be positive or negative.
%
% \subsection{Alternate footnote formatting}
% If you just launch into "EDMAC" using the commands outlined
% above, you will get a standard layout for your text and notes.  You
% may be happy to accept this at the very beginning, while you
% get the hang of things, but the standard layout is not particularly
% pretty, and you will certainly want to modify it in due course.
% "EDMAC" provides ways of changing the fonts and layout of
% your text, but these are not aimed at being totally comprehensive.
% They are enough to deal with simple variations from the norm, and
% to exemplify how you might go on to make more swingeing changes.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\footparagraph}
% \DescribeMacro{\foottwocol}
% \DescribeMacro{\footthreecol}
% All footnotes will normally be formatted as a series of separate
% paragraphs in one column. But there are three other formats
% available for notes, and using these macros you can select a
% different format for a series of notes. "\footparagraph" formats
% all the footnotes of a series as a single paragraph (see
% figs.~\ref{iocasta-out}, \ref{periphyseon-out} and \pageref{vyadi},
% pp.\,\pageref{iocasta-out}, \pageref{periphyseon-out}, and
% \pageref{vyadi}); "\foottwocol" formats them as separate paragraphs,
% but in two columns (see bottom notes in fig.~\ref{arden-out},
% p.\,\pageref{arden-out});
% "\footthreecol", in three columns (see second layer of notes in
% fig.\ref{features-out}, p.\,\pageref{features-out}). Each of these
% macros
% takes one argument: a letter (between "A" and "E") for
% the series of notes you want changed.
% So a text with three layers of notes might begin thus:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \footnormal{A}
% \footthreecol{B}
% \footparagraph{C}
% \end{verbatim}
% This would make the A-notes ordinary, B-notes would be in three
% columns, and the bottom layer of notes would be formed into
% a paragraph on each page.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\interparanoteglue}
% If you use paragraphed footnotes, the macro "\interparanoteglue"
% defines the glue appearing in between footnotes in the paragraph.
% It is a macro whose argument is the glue you want, and its
% initial setting is (see p.\,\pageref{interparanoteglue}):
% \begin{verbatim}
% \interparanoteglue{1em plus .4em minus .4em}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% You should set "\hsize" for the text, and the "\baselineskip" of
% the footnotes (this is done for you if you use the standard
% "\notefontsetup"), before you call any
% of these macros, because their action depends on those values;
% too much or too little space will be allotted for the notes on
% the page if these macros use the wrong
% values.\footnote{\label{nobreaks}There
% is one tiny proviso about using paragraphed notes: you shouldn't
% force any explicit line-breaks inside such notes: do not use
% {\tt \bslash par},
% {\tt \bslash break}, or {\tt \bslash penalty=-10000}.  If
% you must have a line-break for some obscure reason, just suggest
% the break very strongly: {\tt \bslash penalty=-9999} will do
% the trick. Page \pageref{nobreak} explains why this restriction
% is necessary.}
%
% \subsection{Fonts}\label{fonts}
% One of the most important features of the appearance of the notes,
% and indeed of your whole document, will be the fonts used. Because
% the demands of critical editions tax the font-handling system of
% \PlainTeX, we provide both that system and an alternative, the
% New Font Selection System (NFSS) developed for \LaTeX. We will
% first describe the commands that give you control over the
% use of fonts in the different structural elements of the document,
% especially within the notes, and then in
% subsequent sections specify how these commands are used with each
% of the font-handling systems.
%
% (For those who are setting up "EDMAC" for a large job, here is
% a list of the complete set of "EDMAC" macros relating to fonts that
% are intended for manipulation by the user: "\endashchar", "\fullstop",
% "\headlinefont", "\notefontsetup", "\notenumfont",
% "\numlabfont", and "\rbracket". "EDMAC" also assumes that "\rm" has
% been defined so as to select a roman font in the current size,
% and that some reasonable standard font has been selected before
% the package is loaded.)
%
% \DescribeMacro{\notefontsetup}
% \label{notefonts}\relax
% The "\notefontsetup" macro defines the standard set of
% fonts for all your footnotes. This command redefines such commands as
% "\it" so that they refer to an appropriate family of fonts, typically
% different from that used for the main text;
% normally, "EDMAC" chooses eight-point
% fonts for your footnotes, as against ten-point fonts for the main
% text.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\notenumfont}
% The "\notenumfont" macro specifies the font used for the line
% numbers printed in notes. This will typically be a command like
% "\bf" ("EDMAC"'s initial value is "\sevenrm") that selects a
% distinctive style for the
% note numbers, but leaves the choice of a size up to
% "\notefontsetup".
%
% \DescribeMacro{\numlabfont}
% Line numbers for the main text
% are usually printed in a smaller font in the margin.
% The "\numlabfont" macro is provided as a standard name for
% that font: it is initially set to be a seven-point roman font.
% You might wish to use a different font if, for example,
% you preferred to have these line numbers printed using
% old-style numerals.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\select@lemmafont}
% We will briefly discuss "\select@lemmafont"
% here because it is important to know about
% it now, although it is not one of the macros you would expect to
% change in the course of a simple job. Hence it is ``protected''
% by having the @-sign in its name.
%
% When you use the "\text" macro to mark a word in your text
% as a lemma, that word will normally be printed again in your
% apparatus.  If the word in the text happens to be in a font such
% as italic or bold you would probably expect it to appear in the
% apparatus in the same font.  This becomes an absolute necessity
% if the font is actually a different script, such as Arabic or
% Cyrillic.  "\select@lemmafont" does the work of
% decoding "EDMAC"'s data about the fonts used to print the lemma in
% the main text and calling up those fonts for printing the lemma in
% the note.
%
% "\select@lemmafont" is a macro that takes one long
% argument---the cluster of line numbers passed to the note
% commands. This cluster ends with a code indicating what
% fonts were in use at the start of the lemma.
% "\select@lemmafont" selects the appropriate font for the
% note using that font specifier.
%
% "EDMAC" uses "\select@lemmafont" in a standard footnote
% format macro called "\normalfootfmt".  The footnote formats
% for each of the layers "A" to "E" are "\let" equal
% to "\normalfootfmt".  So all the layers of footnotes are
% formatted in the same way.
%
% But it is also likely that you might want to have different fonts
% for just, say, the note numbers in layers "A" and "B" of
% your apparatus.  To do this, make two copies of the
% "\normalfootfmt" macro (see p.\,\pageref{normalfootfmt})---or
% "\twocolfootfmt", or the other appropriate macro ending in
% "-footfmt", depending on what footnote format you have
% selected---and give these macros the names "\Afootfmt" and
% "\Bfootfmt".  Then, in these new macros, change the font
% specifications (and spacing, or whatever) to your liking.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\endashchar}
% \DescribeMacro{\fullstop}
% \DescribeMacro{\rbracket}
% \font\teni=cmmi10
% A relatively trivial matter relates to punctuation.  In your
% footnotes, there will sometimes be spans of line numbers like
% this: 12--34, or lines with sub-line numbers like this: 55.6. The
% en-dash and the full stop are taken from the same font as the
% numbers, and it all works nicely.  But what if you wanted to use
% old-style numbers, like {\teni12} and {\teni34}?  These look nice
% in an edition, but when you use the fonts provided by \PlainTeX\
% they are taken from a math font which does not
% have the en-dash or full stop in the same places as a text font.
% If you (or your macros) just typed "$\oldstyle 12--34$" or
% "$\oldstyle 55.6$" you would get ``{\teni12--34}''and
% ``{\teni55.6}''.  So we define "\endashchar" and
% "\fullstop", which produce an en-dash and a full stop
% respectively from the "\rm" font, whatever font you are using
% for the numbers. These two macros are used in the
% macros which format the line numbers in the margins and
% footnotes, instead of explicit punctuation.
%  We also define an "\rbracket" macro for the
% right square bracket printed at the end of the lemma in many
% styles of textual notes (including "EDMAC"'s standard style).
%
% \subsubsection{The New Font Selection Scheme}
% \label{edmacnfss}\relax
%
% While the handling the fonts in \PlainTeX\ works for simple cases, it
% quickly gets inadequate if you want \TeX\ to load many different
% fonts, or if you frequently change font sizes, languages, etc.  We
% recommend that for all but the simplest editions you consider using the
% New Font Selection Scheme.
%
% The New Font Selection Scheme (NFSS) is a major piece of programming by
% Frank Mittelbach\index{Mittelbach, Frank} and Rainer
% Sch\"opf\index{Sch\"opf, Rainer} which completely rewrites the way \TeX\
% macros handle fonts.  It was first published in {\em TUGboat} in
% 1989.\footnote{{\em TUGboat\/} {\bf 10} (1989), pp.\,222--238.}
% Initially, the NFSS was aimed at replacing the \LaTeX\ system of font
% handling, as contained in "lfonts.tex".\footnote{See {\em TUGboat} {\bf
% 11} (1990), pp.\,297--305.} Later it became part of a major revision of
% the whole of \LaTeX, and is now documented in {\em The \LaTeX\
% Companion}\footnote{By Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and Alexander
% Samarin (Reading, etc.: Addison Wesley, 1994).  See especially
% chapter~7.} and in the files distributed with \LaTeX\
% itself.\footnote{Of the files in the \LaTeXe\ distribution, you should
% especially read "features.tex" and "fontcmds.dtx".}  Another reason why
% you might wish to use the NFSS is that you may already be accustomed to
% using it if you are using \LaTeX\ for other parts of your book, or for
% other publications.
%
% Wayne Sullivan\index{Sullivan, Wayne} adapted an early release of the
% NFSS for separate use with \PlainTeX\ and "EDMAC".\footnote{See the file
% "plainfss.zip" available from internet archive sites of \TeX-related
% material.}  Since then, the NFSS has become more closely integrated
% into \LaTeX.  So today, if you wish to use the NFSS, you should start by
% installing the latest version of \LaTeX.  This does not mean that
% "EDMAC" is compatible with \LaTeX\ in general: it isn't.  But the
% accompanying file "ed-nfss.tex" contains instructions about a simple way
% in which "EDMAC" can use just those parts of \LaTeX\ that define the
% NFSS.\label{ed-nfss}  We have kept these instructions separate because
% \LaTeX\ is in a period of evolution, and things may work differently in
% future. But "EDMAC" itself does contain the `hooks' required to access
% the NFSS if it has been defined.
%
% What will you gain by using the NFSS with "EDMAC"?  {\em The \LaTeX\
% Companion}, referred to above, makes the general case for NFSS in clear
% terms at the beginning of chapter~7.  More specifically, if you
% read the documentation below, you will come across several places
% where we highlight how hamstrung we felt, being limited to the
% font macros available in \PlainTeX.  See the discussion of
% "\select@lemmafont" in particular
% (p.\,\pageref{selectlemmafont}).  If you are happy with the CM
% fonts used by \PlainTeX, plus just a very few others, then you could
% stay with "EDMAC" as it is.  But if you want to use
% completely different families of fonts, such as PostScript fonts,
% or if you plan to use several different languages or alphabets
% such as Armenian or Greek, then your work will be made much easier
% by the NFSS.
%
% Here are some examples of how you might define some of the font
% macros when you use NFSS.
% \begin{verbatim}
%   \def\notefontsetup{\fontsize{7}{8}\selectfont}
%   \let\notenumfont=\rm
% \end{verbatim}
% These commands select seven-point fonts on eight-point baselines
% for the notes, and choose a roman font for the line numbers
% within notes.
%
% \subsubsection{The Plain font selection scheme}
%
% If you run ordinary \TeX\ with "edmac.doc", the
% main font commands of \PlainTeX\ will be available in the normal way
% (see the {\em \TeX book}, chapter 4).
%
% "EDMAC" also defines a set of macros (modelled on some of the "manmac"
% macros from appendix E of {\em The \TeX book}) to
% invoke eight-point fonts, and an "\eightpoint" macro to select
% a whole set of fonts at that size; when the Plain font selection
% scheme is used, this is the initial value of "\notefontsetup". If you
% want to use some other font size for the notes, you will need to
% load the appropriate fonts in your file, and then
% define your own macro on the model of "\eightpoint" that will
% properly assign the baseline spacing, set the various font
% families, and redefine the commands "\rm", "\it", etc.
%
% If your document requires font shapes other than those found
% in \PlainTeX, you will need to go further and modify the
% "\select@lemmafont" macro to handle these shapes:
% see its use on
% p.\,\pageref{selectlemmafont} for more details.  As you will see
% from that description, if you are using some new, outlandish font
% such as Devan\=agar\=\i, you should assign it a new font family,
% in order for "\select@lemmafont" to be able to handle it
% this way. But once you get to this level of complexity, it
% might be better to switch over to the New Font Selection Scheme
% anyway. Note that our use of the Plain font selection scheme makes
% a use of the ``font family'' specifier that is not what was
% intended; and because \TeX's maximum font-family number is $15$,
% it is possible to run out of font families if your text has many
% different kinds of font or uses other macro packages that also
% define new font families. When "EDMAC" uses NFSS, it does not
% meddle with font-family numbers in this way.
%
% Because "\notefontsetup" sets up the whole set of fonts used
% within notes that are likely to change font shapes, it needs
% to be equated to a complex macro like "\eightpoint". But the
% other "EDMAC" font macros---"\notenumfont" and
% "\numlabfont"---are used for text which should not contain any
% font changes, and it is usually good enough to equate one of
% these to a command that selects a specific font at a specific
% size. For example, saying "\let\numlabfont=\seveni" selects
% a seven-point math italic font for marginal line numbers, so
% that the numbers will be printed using old-style figures.
%
% \subsection{Crop marks}
%
% Publishers usually like crop marks on the camera-ready copy for
% works of this kind, so a facility for generating them has been
% incorporated into "EDMAC".
%
% Publishers specify crop marks (or trim lines, etc.) in terms of
% two dimensions, height and width, and they also usually specify
% back and head margins.
%
% The ``head margin'' is the distance between the top of the printed
% text and the top crop marks; it is normally measured
% from the top of the running head, \PlainTeX's
% "\headline". The ``back margins'' (or ``gutter margins'') are
% the right margins of even-numbered pages, and the left margins of
% odd-numbered pages. If you hold a book open in front of you, they
% are the margins in the middle of the opening.
% \begin{figure}
% \unitlength=0.80mm
% \linethickness{0.4pt}
% \begin{picture}(138.00,90.00)
% \put(64.00,80.00){\line(-1,0){5.00}}
% \put(14.01,80.00){\line(1,0){5.00}}
% \put(14.00,15.00){\line(1,0){5.00}}
% \put(59.00,15.00){\line(1,0){5.00}}
% \put(20.01,81.00){\line(0,1){5.00}}
% \put(58.00,86.00){\line(0,-1){5.00}}
% \put(20.00,9.00){\line(0,1){5.00}}
% \put(58.00,14.00){\line(0,-1){5.00}}
% \put(25.00,20.00){\dashbox{2.00}(29.00,45.00)[cc]{}}
% \put(25.00,70.00){\dashbox{2.00}(29.00,2.00)[cc]{{\tiny headline}}}
% \put(10.00,5.00){\framebox(60.00,85.00)[cc]{\shortstack{\strut even\\
%  \strut page\\ \strut text}}}
% \put(133.00,80.00){\line(-1,0){5.00}}
% \put(83.00,80.00){\line(1,0){5.00}}
% \put(83.00,15.00){\line(1,0){5.00}}
% \put(128.00,15.00){\line(1,0){5.00}}
% \put(89.00,81.00){\line(0,1){5.00}}
% \put(127.00,86.00){\line(0,-1){5.00}}
% \put(89.00,9.00){\line(0,1){5.00}}
% \put(127.00,14.00){\line(0,-1){5.00}}
% \put(93.00,20.00){\dashbox{2.00}(29.00,45.00)[cc]{}}
% \put(93.00,70.00){\dashbox{2.00}(29.00,2.00)[cc]{{\tiny headline}}}
% \put(78.00,5.00){\framebox(60.00,85.00)[cc]{\shortstack{\strut odd\\
%  \strut page\\ \strut text}}}
% \put(25.00,77.00){\vector(0,-1){5.00}}
% \put(25.00,77.00){\vector(0,1){3.00}}
% \put(54.03,41.97){\makebox(0,0)[lb]{{\tiny back margin}}}
% \put(91.00,45.00){\vector(-1,0){2.00}}
% \put(91.00,45.00){\vector(1,0){2.00}}
% \put(78.10,42.99){\makebox(0,0)[lb]{{\tiny back margin}}}
% \put(16.00,45.00){\vector(0,1){35.00}}
% \put(16.00,45.00){\vector(0,-1){30.00}}
% \put(-0.03,44.00){\makebox(0,0)[lb]{{\tiny cropsetup \#1}}}
% \put(31.01,8.00){\makebox(0,0)[lb]{{\tiny cropsetup \#2}}}
% \put(54.03,39.97){\makebox(0,0)[lb]{{\tiny (cropsetup \#4)}}}
% \put(26.00,75.00){\makebox(0,0)[lb]{{\tiny (cropsetup \#3)}}}
% \put(26.00,77.00){\makebox(0,0)[lb]{{\tiny head margin}}}
% \put(56.00,45.00){\vector(-1,0){2.00}}
% \put(56.00,45.00){\vector(1,0){2.00}}
% \put(38.03,11.01){\vector(-1,0){17.96}}
% \put(38.03,11.01){\vector(1,0){20.00}}
% \put(105.01,18.01){\vector(1,0){17.04}}
% \put(105.01,18.01){\vector(-1,0){11.96}}
% \put(103.04,16.04){\makebox(0,0)[lb]{{\tiny hsize}}}
% \put(123.97,41.99){\vector(0,-1){21.94}}
% \put(124.00,41.98){\vector(0,1){24.96}}
% \put(124.94,43.05){\makebox(0,0)[lb]{{\tiny vsize}}}
% \put(126.99,66.01){\makebox(0,0)[lc]{{\tiny topskip}}}
% \put(125.99,70.01){\vector(0,-1){3.02}}
% \put(125.99,62.00){\vector(0,1){2.99}}
% \put(124.99,64.99){\line(1,0){2.03}}
% \put(124.99,66.99){\line(1,0){2.03}}
% \end{picture}
% \caption{Crop marks, back and head margins.}
% \label{pages}
% \end{figure}
%               ^^A   Ouch!  I'd hate to do that without
%               ^^A          Georg Horn's TeXcad program!
%
% \DescribeMacro{\cropsetup}
% \label{cropsetup}\relax
% If you want to have crop marks, and to control the back and
% head margins, you issue the "\cropsetup" macro.  It takes
% four parameters (see Figure \ref{pages}):
% \begin{enumerate}\addtolength{\itemsep}{-1ex}
% \item the vertical distance between crop marks,
% \item the horizontal distance between crop marks,
% \item the head margin, and
% \item the back margin.
% \end{enumerate}
%
% In addition to these arguments, "EDMAC"
% uses the "\hsize" of the page, as well as information about the
% height at which the "\headline" floats above the main text (which
% is set in \PlainTeX's "\makeheadline" macro). "EDMAC"
% performs these calculations when you issue the "\cropsetup"
% command.  Therefore, it is important that you set the "\hsize"
% and make any changes to "\makeheadline" {\sl before\/} you issue
% the "\cropsetup" command.  If you do change these values, issue
% the "\cropsetup" command again.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\headlinefont}
% \DescribeMacro{\magicvskip}
% In particular, if the "\headline" is going to be set at a
% different height from the top of the text, or in a different
% font, you can change the appropriate values easily by using
% "\headlinefont" and "\magicvskip".  The former is what
% you would expect; just "\let" it to be whatever font you
% are using (the font macro should include a definition of an
% appropriate "\strutbox" for that font). Note that this specification
% does {\em not\/} change what font is actually used by \TeX, unless
% you modify \TeX's "\headline" macro; it serves only to inform
% "\cropsetup" of the size of your headline font.
%
% The "\magicvskip" gives you direct
% access to what Donald Knuth calls
% a ``magic constant'' on p.\,255 of {\em The \TeX book}.  For
% \PlainTeX, "\magicvskip" is $-22.5$\,pt, but you can change
% this if you want the "\headline" higher or lower than the
% built-in value.  See p.\,\pageref{magic} below for more details.
%
% Apart from this stricture that the "\cropsetup" command
% should follow any changes in "\hsize" and the "\headline",
% there is no relation (other than visual) between the crop marks
% and the "\hsize" and "\vsize".  You can vary any of
% these dimensions independently, without affecting any other. Your
% publisher will almost always want the "\hsize" and
% "\vsize" to be a few picas smaller than the horizontal and
% vertical distances between crop marks.  And if you want to shift
% the whole of your printed page about on the paper, use
% "\hoffset" and "\voffset" as described in {\em The \TeX
% book}, p.\,251, or use the facilities of your "DVI" translator.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\cropwidth}
% \DescribeMacro{\cropgap}
% "\cropwidth" and "\cropgap" define the thickness of
% the rules used for drawing crop marks and the gap by which crop marks
% don't cross; as before, if you change either, do so before using
% the "\cropsetup" macro.
%
% If, for example, you want your text to have a back margin,
% for two-sided printing, but
% you don't want crop marks, just set "\cropwidth=0pt".
%
% \subsection{Endnotes}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\doendnotes}
% \DescribeMacro{\endprint}
% \label{doendnotes}\relax
% "\doendnotes" closes the ".end" file that contains
% the text of the endnotes, if it's open, and
% prints one series of endnotes, as specifed by a series-letter
% argument, e.g., "\doendnotes{A}". "\endprint" is the
% macro that's called to print each note. It uses
% "\notenumfont", "\select@lemmafont", and
% "\notefontsetup" to select fonts, just as the footnote
% macros do (see p.\,\pageref{notefonts} above).
%
% \DescribeMacro{\noendnotes}
% If you aren't going to have any endnotes, you can say "\noendnotes"
% in your file, before the first "\beginnumbering", to suppress the
% generation of an unneeded ".end" file.
%
% \subsection{Cross referencing}
% \label{crossref}\relax
% "EDMAC" provides a simple cross-referencing facility that allows
% you to mark places in the text with labels, and generate page and
% line number references to those places elsewhere in the text using
% those labels.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\label}
% First you place a label in the text using the command
% "\label{foo}". ``"foo"'' can be almost anything you like, including
% letters, numbers, punctuation, or a combination---anything but spaces;
% you might say "\label{toves-3}", for example.\footnote{More precisely,
% you should stick to characters in the \TeX\ categories of ``letter''
% and ``other''.}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\pageref}
% \DescribeMacro{\lineref}
% \DescribeMacro{\sublineref}
% Elsewhere in the text, either before or after the "\label",
% you can refer to its location by saying "\pageref{foo}", or
% "\lineref{foo}", or "\sublineref{foo}". These commands
% will produce, respectively, the page, line and sub-line on which
% the "\label{foo}" command occurred.
%
% A "\label" command may appear in the main text, or in the
% first argument of "\text", but not in the apparatus itself.  But
% "\pageref", "\lineref" and "\sublineref" commands can also be used in
% the apparatus to refer to "\label"s in the text.
%
% The "\label" command works by writing macros to an ".aux"
% file (which will only be created if you are actually using
% some of these commands). Clearly, then, you will need to process
% your document through \TeX\ twice in order for the references to
% be resolved.
%
% You will be warned if you say "\label{foo}" and "foo"
% has been used as a label before. The "ref" commands will
% return references to the last place in the file marked with this
% label. You will also be warned if a reference is made to an
% undefined label. (This will also happen the first time you
% process a document after adding a new "\label" command: the
% auxiliary file will not have been updated yet.)
%
% If you want to refer to a word inside a
% \verb"\text{...}/" command, the "\label" should be defined inside
% the first argument, e.g.,
% \begin{verbatim}
%   The \text{creature\label{elephant} was quite
%     unafraid}\Afootnote{Of the mouse, that is.}/
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\xpageref}
% \DescribeMacro{\xlineref}
% \DescribeMacro{\xsublineref}
% However, there are situations in which you'll want "EDMAC" to
% return a number without displaying any
% warning messages about undefined labels or the like: if you want to
% use the reference in a context where \TeX\ is looking for a
% number, such a warning will lead to a complaint that the number
% is missing. This is the case for references used within the
% argument to "\linenum", for example. For this situation,
% three variants of the reference commands, with the "x"
% prefix, are supplied: "\xpageref", "\xlineref", and "\xsublineref".
% The only operations they perform are ones
% that \TeX\ can do in its ``mouth''. They have these limitations:
% they will not tell you if the label is undefined, and they must
% be preceded in the file by at least one of the four other
% cross-reference commands---e.g., a "\label{foo}" command,
% even if you never refer to that label---since those commands can all
% do the necessary processing of the ".aux" file, and these
% cannot.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\xxref}
% The macros "\xxref" and "\makelabel" let you manipulate numbers
% and labels in ways which you may find helpful in tricky
% situations.
%
% The "\xxref" command generates a reference to a sequence of
% lines, for use in the second argument of "\text".
% It takes two arguments, both of which are
% labels: e.g., "\xxref{mouse}{elephant}".  It calls "\linenum"
% (q.v., p.\,\pageref{linenum} above) and sets the beginning page,
% line, and sub-line numbers to those of the place where
% "\label{mouse}" was placed, and the ending numbers to those where
% "\label{elephant}" occurs.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\makelabel}
% Sometimes the "\label" command cannot be used to specify exactly
% the page and line desired---for example, if you want to refer to a
% page and line number in another volume of your edition.  In such
% cases, you can use the "\makelabel" macro so that you can ``roll
% your own'' label.  For example, if you say
% ``"\makelabel{elephant}{10|25|0}"'' you will have created a new
% label, and a later call to "\pageref{elephant}" would print
% ``10'' and "\lineref{elephant}" would print ``25''. The sub-line
% number here is zero.  It is usually best to collect your
% "\makelabel" statements near the top of your document, so that
% you can see them at a glance.
%
% \subsection{Miscellaneous}
%
% Generally, you should set the "\vsize" and "\hsize" of you
% document at the top, before any "EDMAC" commands are issued,
% since "EDMAC" uses these values to work out some things, like
% crop marks and footnote spacing.  As {\em The \TeX book\/} says
% (p.\,251), ``It's best not to monkey with "\hsize" and "\vsize"
% except at the very beginning of a job\ldots''.
%
% Any changes you make to "\leftskip" or "\rightskip" will apply to
% the main body text, but not to the footnotes.  This is how you
% can get a narrow-set text on a wider base of notes, a common
% style for critical editions.  Footnote material is always set
% "\hsize" wide.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\extensionchars}
% When "EDMAC" assembles the name of the auxiliary file for a
% section, it prefixes "\extensionchars" to the section number.
% This is initially defined to be empty, but you can add some characters to
% help distinguish these files if you like; what you use is likely
% to be system-dependent. If, for example, you said
% "\def\extensionchars{!}", then you would get temporary
% files called "jobname.!1", "jobname.!2", etc.
%
% \subsection{Known bugs}
%
% The \PlainTeX{} "\footnote" command will work only within
% unnumbered text; within numbered text it will wreak havoc.
% In general, "EDMAC"'s system for adding marginal line numbers
% breaks anything that makes direct use of the \TeX{} insert system.
%
% "\parshape" cannot be used within numbered text, except in a
% very restricted way (see p.\,\pageref{parshape}).
%
% \DescribeMacro{\ballast}
% \label{ballastdesc}\relax
% "EDMAC" is a three-pass system, but even after a document has
% been processed three times, there are some tricky situations in
% which the page breaks decided by \TeX\ never settle down.  At
% each successive run of \TeX, "EDMAC" oscillates between two
% different sets of page decisions.  To stop this happening, should
% it arise, Wayne Sullivan\index{Sullivan, Wayne} suggested the
% inclusion of the quantity "\ballast".  The amount of "\ballast"
% will be subtracted from the penalties which apply to the page
% breaks calculated on the {\em previous\/} run through \TeX, thus
% reinforcing these breaks.  So if you find your page breaks
% oscillating, say "\ballast=100" or some such figure, and with any
% luck the page breaks will settle down.  Luckily, this problem
% doesn't crop up at all often.
%
% The restriction on explicit line-breaking in paragraphed footnotes,
% mentioned in footnote \ref{nobreaks}, p.\,\pageref{nobreaks}, and
% described in more detail on p.\,\pageref{nobreaks-detail}, really is a
% nuisance if that's something you need to do.  There are some possible
% solutions, described by Michael Downes\index{Downes, Michael},
% but this area remains unsatisfactory.
%
% Help, suggestions and corrections will be gratefully received.
%
%
% \StopEventually{%
% \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{B}Index}
% \PrintIndex
% ^^A \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\end{multicols}}
% }
%
% \section{Implementation overview}\label{overview}
%
% We present the "EDMAC" code in roughly the order in which it's used
% during a run of \TeX. The order is {\em exactly\/} that in which
% it's read when you load the "EDMAC" package, because the same file
% is used to generate this book and to generate the \TeX{} input
% file. Most of what follows consists of macro definitions, but there
% are some \TeX{} commands that are executed immediately---especially
% at the start of the code. The documentation generally describes the
% code from the point of view of what happens when the macros are
% executed, though. As each macro is introduced, its name is printed
% in the margin.
%
% We begin with the commands you use to start and
% stop line numbering in a section of text (Section~\ref{preliminaries}).
% Next comes the machinery for writing and reading the auxiliary file for
% each section that helps us count lines, and for creating list macros
% encoding the information from that file (Section~\ref{lineation}); this
% auxiliary file will be read at the start of each section, to create
% those list macros, and a new version of the file will be started to
% collect information from the body of the section.
%
% Next are commands for marking sections of
% the text for footnotes (Section~\ref{text}), followed by the macros
% that take each paragraph apart, attach the line numbers and insertions,
% and send the result to the vertical list (Section~\ref{paragraph}). The
% footnote commands (Section~\ref{footnotes}) and output routine
% (Section~\ref{output}) finish the main part of the processing;
% cross-referencing (Section~\ref{xref}) and endnotes
% (Section~\ref{endnotes}) complete the story.
%
% In what follows, macros with an @ in their name are more internal
% to the workings of "EDMAC" than those made up just of
% ordinary letters, just as in \PlainTeX\ (see {\em The \TeX
% book}, p.\,344).  You are meant to be able to make free with
% ordinary macros, but the ``@'' ones should be treated with more
% respect, and changed only if you are pretty sure of what you are
% doing.
%
%
% \section{Preliminaries}
% \label{preliminaries}\relax
%
% When this file is loaded by \TeX, it makes a check, before
% anything else is done, for whether this set of macros has
% already been loaded before. If it has, this file exits without
% being read further; if it hasn't, some informative messages
% are printed.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\edmacloaded\relax\endinput\else\let\edmacloaded=\relax\fi
{\newlinechar=`\^^J
\message{^^J
 ********************************************************************^^J
 EDMAC Critical edition macros.^^J
 Copyright (C) 1990--1996 John Lavagnino and Dominik Wujastyk.^^J
 This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under^^J
 certain conditions; see the accompanying file COPYING for details.^^J
 ^^J%
\fileversion\space\space\space <\filedate>.^^J
 ********************************************************************^^J^^J }}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makeatletter}
% \begin{macro}{\makeatother}
% You can't normally use @ signs within \TeX{} macro names. We
% define macros that allow you to turn this capability on and off;
% and then we turn it on for the time being, since this file
% will use and define many macros with @ signs in their names.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\makeatletter{\catcode`\@=11 }
\def\makeatother{\catcode`\@=12 }
\makeatletter
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@tempcnta}
% \begin{macro}{\@tempcntb}
% In imitation of \LaTeX, we create a couple of scratch counters,
% "\@tempcnta" and "\@tempcntb", that we can
% use like "\count255" (see {\em The \TeX book}, p.\,122).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\@tempcnta \newcount\@tempcntb
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\edmac@warning}
% "EDMAC" will sometimes want to warn you about what's going
% on by writing to your terminal and log file; that operation
% is handled by the "\edmac@warning" macro.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\edmac@warning#1{\immediate\write\sixt@@n{EDMAC warning: #1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Sectioning commands}
%
% \begin{macro}{\section@num}
% You use "\beginnumbering" and "\endnumbering" to begin
% and end a line-numbered section of the text; the pair of commands may
% be used as many times as you like within one document to start
% and end multiple, separately line-numbered sections. \TeX\ will
% maintain and display a ``section number'' as a counter named
% "\section@num" that counts how many
% "\beginnumbering" and "\resumenumbering"
% commands have appeared; it needn't be
% related to the logical divisions of your text.
%
% \begin{macro}{\extensionchars}
% Each section will read and write an associated ``line-list
% file'', containing information used to do the numbering; the file
% will be called \meta{jobname}"."\meta{nn}, where {\it nn\/} is the
% section number. However, you may direct that
% an extra string be added before the
% {\it nn\/} in that filename, in order to distinguish these
% temporary files from others: that string is called
% "\extensionchars". Initially it's empty, since different
% operating systems have greatly varying ideas about what
% characters are permitted in file names.  So
% "\def\extensionchars{-}" gives temporary files called
% "jobname.-1", "jobname.-2", etc.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\section@num
\section@num=0
\let\extensionchars=\empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifnumbering}
% \begin{macro}{\numberingtrue}
% \begin{macro}{\numberingfalse}
% The "\ifnumbering" flag is
% set to "true" if we're within a numbered section (that is, between
% "\beginnumbering" and "\endnumbering"). You can use "\ifnumbering"
% in your own code to check whether you're in a numbered section, but
% don't change the flag's value.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifnumbering
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\beginnumbering}
% "\beginnumbering" begins a section of numbered text.
% When it's executed we increment the section number,
% initialize our counters, send a message to your terminal, and
% call macros to start the lineation machinery and endnote files.
%
% The initializations here are trickier than they look.
% "\line@list@stuff" will use all of the counters
% that are zeroed here when it assembles
% the line-list and other lists of information about the lineation.
% But it will do all of this locally and
% within a group, and when it's done the
% lists will remain but the counters will return to zero. Those same
% counters will then be used as we process the text of this section,
% but the assignments will be made globally. These initializations
% actually apply to both uses, though in all other respects there
% should be no direct interaction between the use of these counters
% and variables in the two processing steps.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\beginnumbering{%
  \ifnumbering
     \errmessage{Numbering has already been started}%
     \endnumbering
  \fi
  \global\numberingtrue
  \global\advance\section@num by 1
  \global\absline@num=0
  \global\line@num=0
  \global\subline@num=0
  \global\@lock=0
  \global\sub@lock=0
  \global\sublines@false
  \global\let\next@page@num=\relax
  \global\let\sub@change=\relax
  \message{Section \the\section@num }%
  \line@list@stuff{\jobname.\extensionchars\the\section@num}%
  \end@stuff}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endnumbering}
% "\endnumbering" must follow the last text for a numbered section.
% It takes care of notifying you when changes have been noted in the
% input that require running the file through again to move everything
% to the right place.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\endnumbering{%
  \ifnumbering
    \global\numberingfalse
    \normal@pars
    \ifx\insertlines@list\empty\else
      \global\noteschanged@true
    \fi
    \ifx\line@list\empty\else
      \global\noteschanged@true
    \fi
    \ifnoteschanged@
      \immediate\write\sixt@@n{EDMAC reminder: }%
      \immediate\write\sixt@@n{ The number of footnotes in this section
                                has changed since the last run.}%
      \immediate\write\sixt@@n{ You will need to run TeX two more times
                                before the footnote placement}%
      \immediate\write\sixt@@n{ and line numbering in this section are
                                correct.}%
    \fi
  \else
    \errmessage{Numbering was not started}%
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pausenumbering}
% \begin{macro}{\resumenumbering}
% The "\pausenumbering" macro is just the same as
% "\endnumbering", but with the "\ifnumbering" flag set to "true", to
% show that numbering continues across the gap.\footnote{Our thanks
% to Wayne Sullivan,\index{Sullivan, Wayne} who suggested the idea
% behind these macros.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pausenumbering{\endnumbering\global\numberingtrue}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The "\resumenumbering" macro is a bit more involved, but not much.
% It does most of the same things as "\beginnumbering", but
% without resetting the various counters. Note that no check is made
% by "\resumenumbering" to ensure that "\pausenumbering" was actually
% invoked.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\resumenumbering{%
  \ifnumbering
     \global\advance\section@num by 1
     \message{Section \the\section@num\space
                               (continuing the previous section)}%
     \line@list@stuff{\jobname.\extensionchars\the\section@num}%
     \end@stuff
  \else
     \errmessage{Numbering should already have been started.}%
     \endnumbering
     \beginnumbering
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \section{Line counting}
% \label{lineation}\relax
%
% \subsection{Choosing the system of lineation}
%
% Sometimes you want line numbers that start at $1$ at the top of each
% page; other times you want line numbers that start at $1$ at the start
% of each section and increase regardless of page breaks.
% "EDMAC" can do it either way, and you can switch from one to the
% other within one work.
% But you have to choose one or the other for all line numbers and
% line references within each section. Here we will define
% internal codes for these systems and the macros you use to select them.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifbypage@}
% \begin{macro}{\bypage@true}
% \begin{macro}{\bypage@false}
% The "\ifbypage@" flag specifies the current lineation
% system: "true" for line-of-section, "false" for line-of-page.
% "EDMAC" will use the line-of-section system unless instructed otherwise.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifbypage@
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\lineation}
% "\lineation" is the macro you use to select the lineation system.
% Its argument is a string: either "page" or "section".
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\lineation#1{{%
  \ifnumbering
    \errmessage{You can't use \string\lineation\space
                          within a numbered section}%
  \else
    \def\@tempa{#1}\def\@tempb{page}%
    \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
        \global\bypage@true
    \else
       \def\@tempb{section}%
       \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
           \global\bypage@false
       \else
           \edmac@warning{Bad \string\lineation\space argument.}%
       \fi
    \fi
  \fi}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\linenummargin}
% \begin{macro}{\line@margin}
% You call "\linenummargin" to specify which margin you want your
% line numbers in; it takes one argument, a string.
% You can put the line numbers in the same margin on every page using
% "left" or "right"; or you can use "inner" or
% "outer" to get them in the inner or outer margins. (These last
% two options assume that even-numbered pages will be on the
% left-hand side of every opening in your book.)
% You can change this within a numbered section, but the
% change may not take effect just when you'd like; if it's done between
% paragraphs nothing surprising should happen.
%
% The selection is recorded in "\line@margin":
% $0$ for left, $1$ for right, $2$ for outer, and $3$ for inner.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\line@margin
\def\linenummargin#1{{%
  \def\@tempa{#1}\def\@tempb{left}%
  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
      \global\line@margin=0
  \else
     \def\@tempb{right}%
     \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
         \global\line@margin=1
     \else
       \def\@tempb{outer}%
       \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
           \global\line@margin=2
       \else
         \def\@tempb{inner}%
         \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
             \global\line@margin=3
         \else
             \edmac@warning{Bad \string\linenummargin\space argument.}%
         \fi
       \fi
     \fi
  \fi}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\firstlinenum}
% \begin{macro}{\linenumincrement}
% The following parameters tell "EDMAC" which lines should be
% printed with line numbers. "\firstlinenum" is the number of the
% first line in each section that gets a number;
% "\linenumincrement"
% is the difference between successive numbered lines. The initial
% values of these counters produce labels on lines $5$, $10$, $15$, etc.
% "\linenumincrement" must be at least $1$.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\firstlinenum
\newcount\linenumincrement
\firstlinenum=5
\linenumincrement=5
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\firstsublinenum}
% \begin{macro}{\sublinenumincrement}
% The following parameters are just like "\firstlinenum" and
% "\linenumincrement", but for sub-line numbers.
% "\sublinenumincrement" must be at least $1$.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\firstsublinenum
\newcount\sublinenumincrement
\firstsublinenum=5
\sublinenumincrement=5
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\lockdisp}
% \begin{macro}{\lock@disp}
% When line locking is being used, the "\lockdisp" macro
% specifies whether a line number---if one is due to
% appear---should be printed on the first printed line or on the
% last, or by all of them. Its argument is a word, either
% "first", "last", or "all".  Initially, it is set to "first".
%
% "\lock@disp" encodes the selection: $0$ for first, $1$ for last,
% $2$ for all.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\lock@disp
\def\lockdisp#1{{%
  \def\@tempa{#1}\def\@tempb{first}%
  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
      \global\lock@disp=0
  \else
     \def\@tempb{last}%
     \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
         \global\lock@disp=1
     \else
       \def\@tempb{all}%
       \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
           \global\lock@disp=2
       \else
           \edmac@warning{Bad \string\lockdisp\space argument.}%
       \fi
     \fi
  \fi}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sublockdisp}
% \begin{macro}{\sublock@disp}
% The same questions about where to print the line number apply to
% sub-lines, and these are the analogous macros for dealing with
% the problem.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\sublock@disp
\def\sublockdisp#1{{%
  \def\@tempa{#1}\def\@tempb{first}%
  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
      \global\sublock@disp=0
  \else
     \def\@tempb{last}%
     \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
         \global\sublock@disp=1
     \else
       \def\@tempb{all}%
       \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
           \global\sublock@disp=2
       \else
           \edmac@warning{Bad \string\sublockdisp\space argument.}%
       \fi
     \fi
  \fi}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\leftlinenum}
% \begin{macro}{\rightlinenum}
% \begin{macro}{\linenumsep}
% \begin{macro}{\numlabfont}
% "\leftlinenum" and "\rightlinenum" are the macros that are
% called to print marginal line numbers on
% a page, for left- and right-hand margins respectively.
% They're made easy to access and change, since you may
% often want to change the styling in some way. These standard versions
% illustrate the general sort of thing that will be needed; they're
% based on the "\leftheadline" macro in {\em The \TeX book}, p.\,416.
%
% Whatever these macros output gets printed in a box that will be
% put into the appropriate margin without any space between it and the
% line of text. You'll generally want a kern between a line number and
% the text, and "\linenumsep" is provided as a standard way of
% storing its size. Line numbers are usually printed in a smaller
% font, and "\numlabfont" is provided as a standard name for that
% font. When called, these macros
% will be executed within a group, so font changes and the like will
% remain local.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\linenumsep
\linenumsep=1pc
\ifx\selectfont\undefined
  \let\numlabfont=\sevenrm
\else
  \def\numlabfont{\fontsize{7}{8pt}\rm}
\fi
\def\leftlinenum{\numlabfont\the\line@num
             \ifsublines@
               \ifnum\subline@num>0
                    \unskip\fullstop\the\subline@num
               \fi
             \fi
             \kern\linenumsep}
\def\rightlinenum{\kern\linenumsep \numlabfont\the\line@num
             \ifsublines@
               \ifnum\subline@num>0
                    \unskip\fullstop\the\subline@num
               \fi
             \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{List macros}
%
% We will make heavy use of lists of information, which will be built
% up and taken apart by the following macros; they are
% adapted from {\em The \TeX book}, pp.\,378--379, which discusses
% their use in more detail.
%
% These macros consume a large amount of the run-time of this code.
% We intend to replace them in a future version, and in anticipation
% of doing so have defined their interface in such a way that it is
% not sensitive to details of the underlying code.
%
% \begin{macro}{\list@create}
% The "\list@create" macro creates a new list. In this version of
% "EDMAC" this macro doesn't do anything beyond initializing an empty
% list macro, but in future versions it will do more.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\list@create#1{\global\let#1=\empty}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\list@clear}
% The "\list@clear" macro just initializes a list to the empty list;
% in this version of "EDMAC" it is no different from
% "\list@create".
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\list@clear#1{\global\let#1=\empty}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\xright@appenditem}
% \begin{macro}{\@toksa}
% \begin{macro}{\@toksb}
% "\xright@appenditem" expands an item and appends it to the right
% end of a list macro. We want the expansion because we'll often
% be using this to store the current value of a counter.
% It creates global control sequences, like "\xdef", and uses two
% temporary token-list registers, "\@toksa" and "\@toksb".
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\@toksa \newtoks\@toksb
\global\@toksa={\\}
\long\def\xright@appenditem#1\to#2{%
  \global\@toksb=\expandafter{#2}%
  \xdef#2{\the\@toksb\the\@toksa\expandafter{#1}}%
  \global\@toksb={}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\xleft@appenditem}
% "\xleft@appenditem" expands an item and appends it to the left
% end of a list macro; it is otherwise identical to
% "\xright@appenditem".
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\xleft@appenditem#1\to#2{%
  \global\@toksb=\expandafter{#2}%
  \xdef#2{\the\@toksa\expandafter{#1}\the\@toksb}%
  \global\@toksb={}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\gl@p}
% The "\gl@p" macro removes the leftmost
% item from a list and places it in a
% control sequence. You say "\gl@p\l\to\z"
% (where "\l" is the list macro, and
% "\z" receives the left item). "\l" is assumed nonempty: say
% "\ifx\l\empty" to test for an empty "\l". The control
% sequences created by "\gl@p" are all global.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\gl@p#1\to#2{\expandafter\gl@poff#1\gl@poff#1#2}
\long\def\gl@poff\\#1#2\gl@poff#3#4{\gdef#4{#1}\gdef#3{#2}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Line-number counters and lists}
%
% Footnote references using line numbers rather than symbols can't be
% generated in one pass, because we don't know the line numbers till we
% ship out the pages. It would be possible if footnotes were never keyed
% to more than one line; but some footnotes gloss passages that may run
% for several lines, and they must be tied to the first line of the
% passage glossed. And even one-line passages require two passes if we
% want line-per-page numbering rather than line-per-section numbering.
%
% So we run \TeX\ over the text several times, and each time save
% information about page and line numbers in a ``line-list file'' to
% be used during the next pass. At the start of each section---whenever
% "\beginnumbering" is executed---the line-list file
% for that section
% is read, and the information from it is encoded into a few list
% macros.
%
% We need first to define the different line numbers that are involved
% in these macros, and the associated counters.
%
% \begin{macro}{\line@num}
% The "\line@num" counter stores the line number that's used in
% marginal line numbering and in notes: counting either from the start of
% the page or from the start of the section, depending on your
% choice for this section. This may be qualified by "\subline@num".
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\line@num
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subline@num}
% The "\subline@num" counter stores
% a sub-line number that qualifies "\line@num". For example,
% line $10$ might have sub-line numbers $1$, $2$ and $3$, which might be
% printed as lines $10.1$, $10.2$, $10.3$.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\subline@num
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifsublines@}
% \begin{macro}{\sublines@true}
% \begin{macro}{\sublines@false}
% We maintain an associated flag, "\ifsublines@",
% to tell us whether we're within
% a sub-line range or not.
%
% You may wonder why we don't just use the value of "\subline@num"
% to determine this---treating anything greater than $0$ as an
% indication that sub-lineation is on. We need a separate flag because
% sub-lineation can be used together with line-number locking in odd
% ways: several pieces of a logical line might be interrupted by
% pieces of sub-lineated text, and those sub-line numbers should not
% return to zero until the next change in the major line number. This
% is common in the typesetting of English Renaissance verse
% drama\index{Middleton, Thomas}, in which stage directions are
% given sub-line numbers: a single line of verse may be
% interrupted by several stage directions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifsublines@
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\absline@num}
% The "\absline@num" counter stores the
% absolute number of lines since the start
% of the section: that is, the number we've actually printed, no matter
% what numbers we attached to them.
% This value is never printed on an output page, though
% "\line@num" will often be equal to it. It is used internally to
% keep track of where notes are to appear and where new
% pages start: using this value rather than "\line@num" is a lot
% simpler, because it doesn't depend on the lineation system in use.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\absline@num
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% We'll be calling "\absline@num" numbers ``absolute'' numbers, and
% "\line@num" and "\subline@num" numbers ``visible'' numbers.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@lock}
% \begin{macro}{\sub@lock}
% The "\@lock" and "\sub@lock" counters
% tell us the state of line-number
% and sub-line-number locking. $0$ means we're not within a locked set of
% lines; $1$ means we're at the first line in the set; $2$, at some
% intermediate line; and $3$, at the last line.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\@lock
\newcount\sub@lock
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\line@list}
% \begin{macro}{\insertlines@list}
% \begin{macro}{\actionlines@list}
% \begin{macro}{\actions@list}
% Now we can define the list macros that will be created from the
% line-list file.  We will maintain the following lists:
% \begin{itemize}\addtolength{\itemsep}{-1ex}
% \item "\line@list": the page and line numbers for every
% lemma marked by "\text".
% There are seven pieces of information, separated by vertical bars:
% \label{linenumbers}
% \begin{enumerate}\addtolength{\itemsep}{-1ex}
% \item the starting page,
% \item line, and
% \item sub-line numbers, followed by the
% \item ending page,
% \item line, and
% \item sub-line numbers, and then the
% \item font specifier for the lemma.
% \end{enumerate}
% These line numbers are all visible numbers.  Thus a lemma that
% started on page $23$, line $35$ and
% went on until page $24$, line $3$
% (with no sub-line numbering), and was typeset in a font from
% "\fam0" would have a line list entry like this:
% "23|35|0|24|3|0|0". That assumes the use of the Plain font selection
% scheme, which uses the family number as its font specifier. When
% NFSS is used, the font specifier is a set of four codes for
% font encoding,
% family, series, and shape, separated by "/" characters; in that
% case, the line-list entry would be
% "23|35|0|24|3|0|OT1/cmr/m/n".
%
% There is one item in this list for every lemma marked by
% "\text", even if there are several notes to that lemma, or no
% notes at all. "\text" reads the data in this list, making it
% available for use in the text of notes.
%
% \item "\insertlines@list": the line numbers of lines that have
% footnotes or other insertions.
% These are the absolute numbers where the corresponding
% lemmas begin. This list contains one entry for every footnote in the
% section; one lemma may contribute no footnotes or many footnotes.
% This list is used by "\add@inserts" within "\do@line", to tell
% it where to insert notes.
%
% \item "\actionlines@list": a list of absolute line numbers at
% which we are to perform special
% actions; these actions are specified by the "\actions@list" list
% defined below.
%
% \item "\actions@list": action codes corresponding to the line
% numbers in "\actionlines@list". These codes tell "EDMAC" what action
% it's supposed to take at each of these lines. One action, the
% page-start action, is generated behind the scenes by "EDMAC" itself;
% the others, for specifying sub-lineation, line-number locking, and
% line-number alteration, are generated only by explicit commands in
% your input file. The page-start and line-number-alteration actions
% require arguments, to specify the new values for the page or line
% numbers; instead of storing those arguments in another list, we have
% chosen the action-code values so that they can encode both the action
% and the argument in these cases. Action codes greater than $-1000$
% are page-start actions, and the code value is the page number; action
% codes less than $-5000$ specify line numbers, and the code value is
% a transformed version of the line number; action codes between these
% two values specify other actions which require no argument.
%
% Here is the full list of action codes and their meanings:
%
% Any number greater than $-1000$ is a page-start action: the line number
% associated with it is the first line on a page, and the action number is
% the page number. (The cutoff of $-1000$ is chosen because negative
% page-number values are used by some macro packages; we assume that
% page-number values less than $-1000$ are not common.)
% Page-start action codes are added to the list by
% the "\page@action" macro, which is (indirectly) triggered by the
% workings of the "\page@start" macro; that macro should always be
% called in the output routine, just before the page contents are
% assembled. "EDMAC" calls it in "\pagecontents".
%
% The action code $-1001$ specifies the start of sub-lineation: meaning
% that, starting with the next line, we should be advancing
% "\subline@num" at each start-of-line command, rather than
% "\line@num".
%
% The action code $-1002$ specifies the end of sub-lineation. At the
% next start-of-line, we should clear the sub-line counter and start
% advancing the line number. The action codes for starting and ending
% sub-lineation are added to the list by the "\sub@action" macro, as
% called to implement the "\startsub" and "\endsub" macros.
%
% The action code $-1003$ specifies the start of line number locking.
% After the number for the current line is computed, it will remain
% at that value through the next line that has an action code to end
% locking.
%
% The action code $-1004$ specifies the end of line number locking.
%
% The action code $-1005$ specifies the start of sub-line number locking.
% After the number for the current sub-line is computed, it will remain
% at that value through the next sub-line that has an action code to end
% locking.
%
% The action code $-1006$ specifies the end of sub-line number locking.
%
% The four action codes for line and sub-line number locking are added
% to the list by the "\do@lockon" and "\do@lockoff" macros, as called
% to implement the "\startlock" and "\endlock" macros.
%
% An action code of $-5000$ or less sets the current visible line
% number (either the line number or the sub-line number, whichever is
% currently being advanced) to a specific positive value. The value of
% the code is $-(5000+n)$, where $n$ is the value (always $\ge 0$)
% assigned to the current line number. Action codes of this type are
% added to the list by the "\set@line@action" macro, as called to
% implement the "\advanceline" and "\setline" macros: this action only
% occurs when the user has specified some change to the line numbers
% using those macros. Normally "EDMAC" computes the visible line numbers
% from the absolute line numbers with reference to the other
% action codes and the settings they invoke; it doesn't require an
% entry in the action-code list for every line.
%
% Here are the commands to create these lists:
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\list@create{\line@list}
\list@create{\insertlines@list}
\list@create{\actionlines@list}
\list@create{\actions@list}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{itemize}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\page@num}
% \begin{macro}{\endpage@num}
% \begin{macro}{\endline@num}
% \begin{macro}{\endsubline@num}
% We'll need some counters while we read the line-list,
% for the page number and the ending page, line, and sub-line numbers.
% Some of these will be used again later on, when we are acting on the
% data in our list macros.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\page@num
\newcount\endpage@num
\newcount\endline@num
\newcount\endsubline@num
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifnoteschanged@}
% \begin{macro}{\noteschanged@true}
% \begin{macro}{\noteschanged@false}
% If the number of footnotes in a section is different from what it was
% during the last run, or if this is the very first time you've run
% \TeX\
% on this file, the information from the line-list used to place the
% notes will be wrong, and some notes will probably be misplaced.
% When this happens, we prefer
% to give a single error message for the whole section rather than
% messages at every point where we notice the problem, because
% we don't really know where in the section notes were added or removed,
% and the solution in any case is simply to run \TeX\ two more times;
% there's no fix needed to the document. The
% "\ifnoteschanged@" flag is set if such
% a change in the number of notes is discovered at any point.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifnoteschanged@
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Reading the line-list file}
%
% \begin{macro}{\read@linelist}
% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
% "\read@linelist" is the control sequence
% that's called by "\beginnumbering"
% (via "\line@list@stuff") to open and process a
% line-list file; its argument is the name of the file, which will
% be opened on stream "\@inputcheck" to check for its existence.
% The first thing we do is initialize all the lists we just
% described.\label{readlinelist}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newread\@inputcheck
\def\read@linelist#1{%
  \list@clear{\line@list}%
  \list@clear{\insertlines@list}%
  \list@clear{\actionlines@list}%
  \list@clear{\actions@list}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Try to open the line-list file, as a check on whether it exists.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \openin\@inputcheck=#1
  \ifeof\@inputcheck
    \edmac@warning{Can't find line-list file #1}%
    \global\noteschanged@true
  \else
    \global\noteschanged@false
    \closein\@inputcheck
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% The file's there. We start a new group and make some special
% definitions we'll need to process it: it's a sequence of \TeX\
% commands, but they require a few special settings. We make [ and
% ] become grouping characters: they're used that way in the
% line-list file, because we need to write them out one at a time
% rather than in balanced pairs, and it's easier to just use
% something other than real braces. @ must become a letter, since
% this is run in the ordinary \TeX\ context. We ignore carriage
% returns, since if we're in horizontal mode they can get
% interpreted as spaces to be printed.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \begingroup
     \catcode`\[=1 \catcode`\]=2
     \makeatletter \catcode`\^^M=9
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Our line, page, and line-locking counters were already zeroed
% by "\line@list@stuff" if this is being called from within
% "\beginnumbering"; sub-lineation will be turned off as well
% in that case. On the other hand,
% if this is being called from "\resumenumbering", those things
% should still have the values they had when "\pausenumbering"
% was executed.
%
% Now, after these preliminaries, we start interpreting the file.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
     \input #1
  \endgroup
 \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% When the "\input" is done, we're all through with the
% line-list file. All the information we needed
% from it will now be encoded in our list macros.
%
% Finally, we
% initialize the "\next@actionline" and "\next@action" macros,
% which specify where and what the next action to be taken is.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \global\page@num=-1
  \ifx\actionlines@list\empty
      \gdef\next@actionline{1000000}%
  \else
      \gl@p\actionlines@list\to\next@actionline
      \gl@p\actions@list\to\next@action
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% This version of "\read@linelist" creates list macros
% containing data for the entire section, so they could get rather
% large. It would be no more difficult to read the line-list file
% incrementally rather than all at once: we could read, at the
% start of each paragraph, only the commands relating to that
% paragraph, using "\read". But this would require that we
% have two line-lists open at once, one for reading, one for
% writing, and on systems without version numbers we'd have to do
% some file renaming outside of \TeX{} for that to work. We've
% retained this slower approach to avoid that sort of hacking
% about, but have provided the "\pausenumbering" and
% "\resumenumbering" macros to help you if you run into
% macro memory limitations (see p.\,\pageref{pause} above).
%
% \subsection{Commands within the line-list file}
%
% This section defines the commands that can appear within a
% line-list file. They all have very short names because we are
% likely to be writing very large numbers of them out. One macro,
% "\@l", is especially short, since it will be written to the
% line-list file once for every line of text in a numbered section.
% (Another of these commands, "\@lab", will be introduced in a
% later section, among the cross-referencing commands it is
% associated with.)
%
% When these commands modify the various page and line counters,
% they deliberately do not say "\global". This is because we
% want them to affect only the counter values within the current
% group when nested calls of "\@ref" occur. (The code assumes
% throughout that the value of "\globaldefs" is zero.)
%
% The macros with "action" in their names contain all the code
% that modifies the action-code list: again, this is so that they
% can be turned off easily for nested calls of "\@ref".
%
% \begin{macro}{\@l}
% "\@l" does everything related to the start of a
% new line of numbered text.
%
% First increment the absolute line-number, and perform
% deferred actions relating to page starts and sub-lines.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@l{\advance\absline@num by 1
         \ifx\next@page@num\relax \else
             \page@action
             \let\next@page@num=\relax
         \fi
         \ifx\sub@change\relax \else
            \ifnum\sub@change>0
               \sublines@true
            \else
               \sublines@false
            \fi
            \sub@action
            \let\sub@change=\relax
         \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Fix the lock counters, if necessary. A value of $1$ is advanced to
% $2$; $3$ advances to $0$; other values are unchanged.
%    \begin{macrocode}
         \ifcase\@lock
            \or
               \@lock=2
            \or \or
               \@lock=0
         \fi
         \ifcase\sub@lock
            \or
               \sub@lock=2
            \or \or
               \sub@lock=0
         \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Now advance the visible line number, unless it's been locked.
%    \begin{macrocode}
         \ifsublines@
              \ifnum\sub@lock<2
                \advance\subline@num by 1
              \fi
         \else
              \ifnum\@lock<2
                \advance\line@num by 1 \subline@num=0
              \fi
         \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@page}
% "\@page" marks the start of a new output page; its argument is
% the number of that page.
%
% First we reset the visible line numbers, if we're numbering by page,
% and store the page number itself in a counter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@page#1{\ifbypage@
             \line@num=0 \subline@num=0
           \fi
           \page@num=#1
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% And we set a flag that tells "\@l" that a new page number is
% to be set, because other associated actions shouldn't occur until the
% next line-start occurs.
%    \begin{macrocode}
           \def\next@page@num{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sub@on}
% \begin{macro}{\sub@off}
% The "\sub@on" and "\sub@off" macros
% turn sub-lineation on and off\/: but not directly, since such changes
% don't really take effect until the next line of text. Instead
% they set a flag that notifies "\@l" of the necessary action.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\sub@on{\ifsublines@
     \let\sub@change=\relax
  \else
     \def\sub@change{1}%
  \fi}
\def\sub@off{\ifsublines@
     \def\sub@change{-1}%
  \else
     \let\sub@change=\relax
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@adv}
% The "\@adv" macro advances
% the current visible line number by the amount specified as
% its argument. This is used to implement "\advanceline".
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@adv#1{\ifsublines@
       \advance\subline@num by #1
       \ifnum\subline@num<0
          \edmac@warning{\string\advanceline\space produced
              a sub-line number less than zero.}%
          \subline@num=0
       \fi
  \else
       \advance\line@num by #1
       \ifnum\line@num<0
          \edmac@warning{\string\advanceline\space produced
              a line number less than zero.}%
          \line@num=0
       \fi
  \fi
  \set@line@action}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@set}
% The "\@set" macro sets
% the current visible line number to the value specified as
% its argument.  This is used to implement "\setline".
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@set#1{\ifsublines@
    \subline@num=#1
  \else
    \line@num=#1
  \fi
  \set@line@action}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\page@action}
% "\page@action"
% adds an entry to the action-code list to change the page number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\page@action{%
  \xright@appenditem{\the\absline@num}\to\actionlines@list
  \xright@appenditem{\next@page@num}\to\actions@list}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\set@line@action}
% "\set@line@action" adds an entry to the action-code
% list to change the visible line number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\set@line@action{%
  \xright@appenditem{\the\absline@num}\to\actionlines@list
  \ifsublines@
       \@tempcnta=-\subline@num
  \else
       \@tempcnta=-\line@num
  \fi
  \advance\@tempcnta by -5000
  \xright@appenditem{\the\@tempcnta}\to\actions@list}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sub@action}
% "\sub@action"
% adds an entry to the action-code list to turn sub-lineation on or
% off, according to the current value of the "\ifsublines@" flag.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\sub@action{%
  \xright@appenditem{\the\absline@num}\to\actionlines@list
  \ifsublines@
      \xright@appenditem{-1001}\to\actions@list
  \else
      \xright@appenditem{-1002}\to\actions@list
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\lock@on}
% \begin{macro}{\do@lockon}
% "\lock@on"
% adds an entry to the action-code list to turn line number
% locking on. The current setting of the sub-lineation flag tells us
% whether this applies to line numbers or sub-line numbers.
%
% Adding commands to the action list is slow, and it's very often the
% case that a lock-on command is immediately followed by a lock-off
% command in the line-list file, and therefore really does nothing.
% We use a look-ahead scheme here to detect such pairs, and add nothing
% to the line-list in those cases.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\lock@on{\futurelet\next\do@lockon}
\def\do@lockon{%
  \ifx\next\lock@off
     \global\let\lock@off=\skip@lockoff
  \else
     \xright@appenditem{\the\absline@num}\to\actionlines@list
     \ifsublines@
       \xright@appenditem{-1005}\to\actions@list
       \ifcase\sub@lock
          \sub@lock=1
       \else
          \sub@lock=0
       \fi
     \else
       \xright@appenditem{-1003}\to\actions@list
       \ifcase\@lock
          \@lock=1
       \else
          \@lock=0
       \fi
     \fi
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\lock@off}
% \begin{macro}{\do@lockoff}
% \begin{macro}{\skip@lockoff}
% "\lock@off" adds an entry to the action-code list
% to turn line number locking off.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\do@lockoff{%
  \xright@appenditem{\the\absline@num}\to\actionlines@list
  \ifsublines@
    \xright@appenditem{-1006}\to\actions@list
    \ifnum\sub@lock=2
       \sub@lock=3
    \else
       \sub@lock=0
    \fi
  \else
    \xright@appenditem{-1004}\to\actions@list
    \ifnum\@lock=2
       \@lock=3
    \else
       \@lock=0
    \fi
  \fi}
\def\skip@lockoff{\global\let\lock@off=\do@lockoff}
\global\let\lock@off=\do@lockoff
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ref}
% \begin{macro}{\insert@count}
% "\@ref"
% marks the start of a passage, for creation of a footnote reference.
% It takes two arguments:
% \begin{itemize}\addtolength{\itemsep}{-1ex}
% \item "#1", the number of entries to add to "\insertlines@list"
% for this reference. \SpecialMainIndex{\insert@count}
% This value, here and within "\text",
% which computes it and writes it to the line-list file,
% will be stored in the "\insert@count" counter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\insert@count
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \item "#2", a sequence of other line-list-file commands, executed to
% determine the ending line-number. (This may also include other
% "\@ref" commands, corresponding to uses of "\text"
% within the first argument of another instance of "\text".)
% \end{itemize}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dummy@ref}
% When nesting of "\@ref" commands does occur, it's necessary to
% temporarily redefine "\@ref" within "\@ref", so that we're only
% doing one of these at a time.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\dummy@ref#1#2{#2}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The first thing "\@ref" itself does is to add the specified number
% of items to the "\insertlines@list" list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@ref#1#2{%
  \global\insert@count=#1
  \loop\ifnum\insert@count>0
    \xright@appenditem{\the\absline@num}\to\insertlines@list
    \global\advance\insert@count by -1
  \repeat
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Next, process the second argument to determine the page
% and line numbers for the end of this lemma.
% We temporarily equate "\@ref" to a different macro that just executes
% its argument, so that nested "\@ref" commands are just skipped
% this time. Some other macros need to be temporarily redefined to
% suppress their action.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \begingroup
    \let\@ref=\dummy@ref
    \let\page@action=\relax
    \let\sub@action=\relax
    \let\set@line@action=\relax
    \let\@lab=\relax
    #2
    \global\endpage@num=\page@num
    \global\endline@num=\line@num
    \global\endsubline@num=\subline@num
  \endgroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Now store all the information about the location of the lemma's
% start and end in "\line@list".
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \xright@appenditem%
      {\the\page@num|\the\line@num|%
       \ifsublines@ \the\subline@num \else 0\fi|%
       \the\endpage@num|\the\endline@num|%
       \ifsublines@ \the\endsubline@num \else 0\fi}\to\line@list
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Finally, execute the second argument of "\@ref" again,
% to perform for real all the commands within it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  #2}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Writing to the line-list file}
%
% We've now defined all the counters, lists, and commands involved in
% reading the line-list file at the start of a section. Now we'll
% cover the commands that "EDMAC" uses within the text of a
% section to write commands out to the line-list.
%
% \begin{macro}{\linenum@out}
% The file will be opened on output stream "\linenum@out".
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newwrite\linenum@out
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\iffirst@linenum@out@}
% \begin{macro}{\first@linenum@out@true}
% \begin{macro}{\first@linenum@out@false}
% Once any file is opened on this stream, we keep it open forever, or
% else switch to another file that we keep open. The reason is that
% we want the output routine to write the page number for every page
% to this file; otherwise we'd have to write it at the start of
% every line.
% But it's not very easy for the output routine to tell whether an
% output stream is open or not. There's no way to test the status of
% a particular output stream directly, and
% the asynchronous nature of output routines makes the
% status hard to determine by other means.
%
% We can manage pretty well by means of the "\iffirst@linenum@out@"
% flag; its inelegant name suggests the nature of the problem that
% made its creation necessary. It's set
% to be "true" before any "\linenum@out" file is opened. When such a file
% is opened for the first time, it's done using "\immediate", so that
% it will at once be safe for the output routine to write to it; we then
% set this flag to "false".
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\iffirst@linenum@out@
\first@linenum@out@true
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\line@list@stuff}
% The "\line@list@stuff" macro, which
% is called by "\beginnumbering", performs
% all the line-list operations needed at the start of a section.
% Its argument is the name of the line-list file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\line@list@stuff#1{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% First, use the commands of the previous section to interpret the
% line-list file from the last run.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \read@linelist{#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Now close the current output line-list file, if any, and open a new one.
% The first time we open a line-list file for output, we do it using
% "\immediate", and clear the "\iffirst@linenum@out@" flag.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \iffirst@linenum@out@
     \immediate\closeout\linenum@out
     \global\first@linenum@out@false
     \immediate\openout\linenum@out=#1
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% If we get here, then this is
% not the first line-list we've seen, so we
% don't open or close the files immediately. We also need to insert
% a "\@page" command, since this might begin in the middle of
% a page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
     \closeout\linenum@out
     \openout\linenum@out=#1
     \page@start
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\new@line}
% The "\new@line" macro sends the "\@l" command to the line-list
% file, to mark the start of a new text line.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\new@line{\write\linenum@out{\string\@l}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\flag@start}
% \begin{macro}{\flag@end}
% We enclose a lemma marked by "\text" in
% "\flag@start" and "\flag@end": these send the "\@ref"
% command to the line-list file. "\text" is responsible for
% setting the value of "\insert@count" appropriately; it
% actually gets done by the various footnote macros.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\flag@start{%
  \edef\next{\write\linenum@out{%
                  \string\@ref[\the\insert@count][}}%
  \next}
\def\flag@end{\write\linenum@out{]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\page@start}
% "\page@start" writes a command to the line-list
% file noting the current page number.
% When used within an output routine, this should be called so as to place
% its "\write" within the box that gets shipped out, and as close to
% the top of that box as possible.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\page@start{%
  \iffirst@linenum@out@ \else
    \write\linenum@out{\string\@page[\the\pageno]}%
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\startsub}
% \begin{macro}{\endsub}
% "\startsub" and "\endsub"
% turn sub-lineation on and off, by writing
% appropriate instructions to the line-list file.  When
% sub-lineation is in effect, the line number counter is frozen and
% the sub-line counter advances instead. If one of these commands
% appears in the middle of a line, it doesn't take effect until the
% next line; in other words, a line is counted as a line or
% sub-line depending on what it started out as, even if that
% changes in the middle.
%
% We tinker with "\lastskip" because a command of either sort
% really needs to be attached to the last word preceding the change, not
% the first word that follows the change. This is because sub-lineation
% will often turn on and off in mid-line---stage directions, for example,
% often are mixed with dialogue in that way---and when a line is mixed
% we want to label it using the system that was in effect at its start.
% But when sub-lineation begins at the very start of a line we have a
% problem, if we don't put in this code.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\startsub{\dimen0\lastskip
  \ifdim\dimen0>0pt \unskip \fi
  \write\linenum@out{\string\sub@on}%
  \ifdim\dimen0>0pt \hskip\dimen0 \fi}
\def\endsub{\dimen0\lastskip
  \ifdim\dimen0>0pt \unskip \fi
  \write\linenum@out{\string\sub@off}%
  \ifdim\dimen0>0pt \hskip\dimen0 \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\advanceline}
% You can use "\advanceline"
% in running text to advance the current visible
% line-number by a specified value, positive or negative.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\advanceline#1{\write\linenum@out{\string\@adv[#1]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setline}
% You can use "\setline"
% in running text to set the current visible
% line-number to a specified positive value.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\setline#1{%
  \ifnum#1<0
    \edmac@warning{Bad setline argument.}%
  \else
    \write\linenum@out{\string\@set[#1]}%
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\startlock}
% \begin{macro}{\endlock}
% You can use "\startlock" or "\endlock"
% in running text to start or end line number locking at
% the current line. They decide whether line numbers or sub-line numbers
% are affected, depending on the current state of the sub-lineation flags.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\startlock{\write\linenum@out{\string\lock@on}}
\def\endlock{\write\linenum@out{\string\lock@off}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Marking text for notes}
% \label{text}\relax
%
% The "\text" macro is used to create all footnotes and endnotes,
% as well as to print the portion of the main text to which a given note
% or notes is keyed. The idea is to have that lemma appear only once in
% the ".tex" file: all instances of it in the main text and in the
% notes are copied from that one appearance.
%
% "\text" requires two arguments. At any point within numbered
% text, you use it by saying:
% \begin{verbatim}
%     \text{#1}{#2}/
% \end{verbatim}
% where
% \begin{itemize}\addtolength{\itemsep}{-1ex}
% \item "#1" is the piece of the main text being glossed;
% it gets added to the
% main text, and is also used as a lemma for notes to it.
%
% \item "#2" is a series of subsidiary macros that generate
% various kinds of notes. The "/" after "#2" {\em must\/} appear:
% it marks the end of the macro. ({\em The \TeX{}book},
% p.\,204, points out that when
% additional text to be matched follows the arguments like this, spaces
% following the macro are not skipped, which is very desirable since
% this macro will never be used except within text. Having an
% explicit terminator also helps keep things straight when nested
% calls to "\text" are used.)  Braces around
% "#2" are optional.
% \end{itemize}
%
% The "\text" macro may be used (somewhat) recursively; that
% is, "\text" may be used within its own first argument. The
% code would be much simpler without this feature, but nested notes
% will commonly be necessary: it's quite likely that we'll have an
% explanatory note for a long passage and notes on variants for
% individual words within that passage. The situation we can't
% handle is overlapping notes that aren't nested: for example, one
% note covering lines 10--15, and another covering 12--18. You can
% handle such cases by using the "\lemma" and "\linenum"
% macros within "#2": they alter the copy of the lemma and the
% line numbers that are passed to the notes, and hence allow you to
% overcome any limitations of this system, albeit with extra
% effort.
%
% The recursive operation of "\text" will fail if you try to use a copy
% that is called something other than "\text". In order to handle
% recursion, "\text" needs to redefine its own definition temporarily
% at one point, and that doesn't work if the macro you are calling is
% not actually named "\text". There's no problem as long as "\text"
% is not invoked in the first argument. If you want to call "\text"
% something else, it is best to create instead a macro that expands
% to an invocation of "\text", rather than copying "\text" and giving
% it a new name; otherwise you will need to add an appropriate
% definition for your new macro to "\morenoexpands".
%
% Side effects of our line-numbering code make it impossible to use
% the usual footnote macros directly within a paragraph whose lines are
% numbered (see comments to
% "\do@line", p.\,\pageref{doline}).
% Instead, the appropriate note-generating command
% is appended to the list macro "\inserts@list", and when "\pend"
% completes the paragraph it inserts all the notes at the proper places.
%
% Note that we don't provide previous-note information, although it's
% often wanted; your own macros must handle that. We can't do it
% correctly without keeping track of what kind of notes have gone past:
% it's not just a matter of remembering the line numbers associated with
% the previous invocation of "\text", because that might have been for
% a different kind of note. It is preferable for your footnote macros
% to store and recall this kind of information if they need it.
%
% \label{parallel}An example where some ``memory'' of line numbers
% might be required is where there are several variant readings
% per line of text, and you do not wish the line number to be repeated
% for each lemma in the notes.  After the first occurrence of the line
% number, you might want the symbol ``$\parallel$'' instead of further
% occurrences, for instance.  This can easily be done by a macro like
% "\printlines", if it saves the last value of "\@nums" that {\em it\/}
% saw, and then performs a simple conditional test to see whether to print
% a number or a~``$\parallel$'' (see p.\,\pageref{multinotes} for an
% example of how to do this).
%
% \subsection{{\tt \protect\bslash text} itself}
%
% \begin{macro}{\end@lemmas}
% The various note-generating macros might want to request that
% commands be executed not at once, but in close connection with the
% start or end of the lemma. For example, footnote numbers in the text
% should be connected to the end of the lemma; or, instead of a single
% macro to create a note listing variants, you might want to use
% several macros in series to create individual variants, which would
% each add information to a private macro or token register, which in
% turn would be formatted and output when all of "#2" for the lemma
% has been read.
%
% To accomodate this, we provide a list macro
% to which macros may add commands that should subsequently
% be executed at the end of the lemma when that lemma is added
% to the text of the paragraph. A macro should add its contribution to
% "\end@lemmas" by using "\xleft@appenditem".
% (Anything that needs to be done at
% the {\em start\/} of the lemma may be handled using "\aftergroup", since
% the commands specified within "\text"'s second argument are
% executed within a group that ends just before the lemma is added to
% the main text.)
%
% "\end@lemmas" is intended for the few things that need to be
% associated with the end of the lemma, like footnote numbers. Such
% numbers are not implemented in the current version, and indeed
% no use is currently made of "\end@lemmas" or of the "\aftergroup"
% trick. The general
% approach would be to define a macro to be used within the second
% argument of "\text" that would add the appropriate command to
% "\end@lemmas".
%
% Commands that are added to this list should always take care
% not to do anything that adds possible line-breaks to the output;
% otherwise line numbering could be thrown off.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\list@create{\end@lemmas}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dummy@text}
% We now need to define a number of macros that allow us to weed out
% nested instances of "\text", and other problematic macros, from
% our lemma. This is similar to what we did in reading the line-list
% file using "\dummy@ref" and various redefinitions---and that's
% because nested "\text" macros create nested "\@ref" entries
% in the line-list file.
%
% Here's a macro that takes the same arguments as
% "\text" but merely returns the first argument and ignores
% the second.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\dummy@text#1#2/{#1}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@gobble}
% We're going to need another macro that takes one argument and ignores
% it entirely. This one is identical to the \LaTeX{} macro of the same
% name.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gobble#1{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\no@expands}
% \begin{macro}{\morenoexpands}
% We need to turn off macro expansion for certain sorts of macros we're
% likely to see within the lemma and within the notes.
%
% The first class is font-changing macros. We suppress expansion for
% them by letting them become equal to zero.\footnote{Since ``control
% sequences equivalent to characters are not expandable''---{\em The
% \TeX book\/}, answer to Exercise 20.14.} This is done because we want to
% pass into our notes the generic commands to change to roman or
% whatever, and not their expansions that will ask for a particular style at
% a specified size.  The notes may well be in a smaller font, so the
% command should be expanded later, when the note's environment is in
% effect.
%
% A second sort to turn off includes a few of the accent macros.
% Most are not a problem: an accent that's expanded to an "\accent"
% command may be harder to read but it works just the same. The
% ones that cause problems are: those that use alignments---\TeX\
% seems to get confused about the difference between alignment
% parameters and macro parameters; those that use temporary control
% sequences; and those that look carefully at what the current font
% is.
%
% (The "\copyright" macro defined in \PlainTeX\ has this sort of
% problem as well, but isn't used enough to bother with. That macro,
% and any other that causes trouble, will get by all right if you put
% a "\noexpand" in front of it in your file---or a "\protect" if
% you're using NFSS.)
%
% We also need to eliminate all "EDMAC" macros like "\label" and
% "\setline" that write things to auxiliary files: that writing
% should be done only once. And we make
% "\text" itself, if it appears within its own
% argument, do nothing but copy its first argument.
%
% Finally, we execute "\morenoexpands". The version of
% "\morenoexpands" defined here does nothing; but you may define
% a version of your own when you need to add more expansion
% suppressions as needed with your macros. That makes it possible
% to make such additions without needing to copy or modify the
% standard "EDMAC" code. If you define your own
% "\morenoexpands", you must be very careful about spaces: if the
% macro adds any spaces to the text when it runs, extra space
% will appear in the main text when "\text" is used.
%
% (A related problem, not addressed by these two macros,
% is that of characters whose category code is changed by any
% the macros used in the arguments to "\text". Since the
% category codes are set when the arguments are scanned, macros
% that depend on changing them will not work. We have most often
% encountered this with characters that are made ``active'' within
% text in some, but not all, of the languages used within the document.
% One way around the problem, if it takes this form,
% is to ensure that those characters are {\em always\/} active; within
% languages that make no special use of them, their associated
% control sequences should simply return the proper character.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\no@expands{\let\rm=0\let\it=0\let\sl=0\let\bf=0\let\tt=0%
  \let\b=0\let\c=0\let\d=0\let\t=0%
  \let\select@@lemmafont=0%
  \def\protect{\noexpand\protect\noexpand}%
  \let\startsub=\relax  \let\endsub=\relax
  \let\startlock=\relax \let\endlock=\relax
  \let\label=\@gobble   \let\pageref=\@gobble
  \let\lineref=\@gobble \let\sublineref=\@gobble
  \let\setline=\@gobble \let\advanceline=\@gobble
  \let\text=\dummy@text
  \morenoexpands}
\let\morenoexpands=\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\text}
% Now we begin "\text" itself. The definition requires a "/" after
% the arguments: this eliminates the possibility of problems about
% knowing where "#2" ends. This also changes the handling of spaces
% following an invocation of the macro: normally such spaces are
% skipped, but in this case they're significant because "#2" is
% a ``delimited parameter''. Since "\text" is always used in running
% text, it seems more appropriate to pay attention to spaces than to
% skip them.
%
% When executed, "\text" first ensures that we're in
% horizontal mode.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\text#1#2/{\leavevmode
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@tag}
% Our normal lemma is just argument "#1"; but that argument could have
% further invocations of "\text" within it. We get a copy of the
% lemma without any "\text" macros within it by temporarily redefining
% "\text" to just copy its first argument and ignore the other,
% and then expand "#1" into "\@tag", our lemma.
%
% This is done within a group that starts here, in order to get the
% original "\text" restored; within this group we've also turned
% off the expansion of those control sequences commonly found within text
% that can cause trouble for us.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \begingroup
    \no@expands
    \xdef\@tag{#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@nums}
% \label{nums}
% Prepare more data for the benefit of note-generating macros: the line
% references and font specifier for this lemma go to "\@nums".
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \set@line
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% "\insert@count" will be altered by the note-generating macros:
% it counts the number of deferred footnotes or other insertions
% generated by this instance of "\text".
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \global\insert@count=0
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Now process the note-generating macros in argument "#2"
% (i.e., "\Afootnote", "\lemma", etc.). "\ignorespaces" is here to
% skip over any spaces that might appear at the start of "#2";
% otherwise they wind up in the main text. Footnote and other
% macros that are used within "#2" should all end with
% "\ignorespaces" as well, to skip any spaces between macros when
% several are used in series.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ignorespaces #2\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Finally, we're ready to admit the first argument into the current
% paragraph.
%
% It's important that we generate and output all the notes for this
% chunk of text {\em before} putting the text into the paragraph: notes
% that are referenced by line number should generally be tied to the
% start of the passage they gloss, not the end. That should all be done
% within the expansion of "#2" above, or in "\aftergroup"
% commands within that expansion.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \flag@start
  \endgroup
  #1%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Finally, we add any insertions that are
% associated with the {\em end\/} of
% the lemma. Footnotes that are identified by symbols rather than by
% where the lemma begins in the main text need to be done here, and
% not above.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\end@lemmas\empty \else
    \gl@p\end@lemmas\to\x@lemma
    \x@lemma
    \global\let\x@lemma=\relax
  \fi
  \flag@end}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\set@line}
% The "\set@line" macro
% is called by "\text" to put the line-reference field and
% font specifier for the current block of text into "\@nums".
%
% One instance of "\text" may generate several notes, or it
% may generate none---it's legitimate for argument "#2" to "\text" to
% be empty. But "\flag@start" and "\flag@end" induce the generation of
% a single entry in "\line@list" during the next run, and it's vital
% to also remove one and only one "\line@list" entry here.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\set@line{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% If no more lines are listed in "\line@list", something's
% wrong---probably just some change in the input. We set all the numbers
% to zeros, following an old publishing convention for numerical
% references that haven't yet been resolved.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\line@list\empty
    \global\noteschanged@true
    \xdef\@nums{000|000|000|000|000|000|\edfont@info}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%  All's well; our reference is there.
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \else
   \gl@p\line@list\to\@tempb
   \xdef\@nums{\@tempb|\edfont@info}%
   \global\let\@tempb=\undefined
 \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\edfont@info}
% The macro "\edfont@info" returns coded information about the
% current font; the coding depends on the font selection scheme
% in use. See section~\ref{fontcode} for more on font selection
% schemes.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\selectfont\undefined       % we're using Plain fonts
  \def\edfont@info{\the\fam}
\else                           % we're using NFSS
  \def\edfont@info{\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series/\f@shape}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Substitute lemma}
%
% \begin{macro}{\lemma}
% The "\lemma" macro allows you to change the lemma
% that's passed on to the notes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\lemma#1{\xdef\@tag{#1}\ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Substitute line numbers}
%
% \begin{macro}{\linenum}
% \label{linenumdef}\relax
% The "\linenum" macro can change any or all of
% the page and line numbers that are
% passed on to the notes.
%
% As argument "\linenum" takes a set of seven parameters
% separated by vertical bars, in the format used internally for
% "\@nums" (see p.\,\pageref{linenumbers}): the starting page,
% line, and sub-line numbers, followed by the ending page, line, and
% sub-line numbers, and then the font specifier for the lemma.
% However, you can omit any parameters you don't want to change, and
% you can omit a string of vertical bars at the end of the
% argument. Hence "\linenum{18|4|0|18|7|1|0}" is an invocation
% that changes all the parameters, but "\linenum{|3}" only
% changes the starting line number, and leaves the rest unaltered.
%
% We use "\\" as an internal separator for the macro parameters.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\linenum#1{%
  \xdef\@tempa{#1|||||||\noexpand\\\@nums}%
  \global\let\@nums=\empty
  \expandafter\line@set\@tempa|\\\ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\line@set}
% "\linenum" calls "\line@set" to do the actual work; it
% looks at the first number in the argument to "\linenum",
% sets the corresponding value in "\@nums", and then calls
% itself to process the next number in the "\linenum"
% argument, if there are more numbers in "\@nums" to process.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\line@set#1|#2\\#3|#4\\{%
  \gdef\@tempb{#1}%
  \ifx\@tempb\empty
        \@add{#3}%
  \else
        \@add{#1}%
  \fi
  \gdef\@tempb{#4}%
  \ifx\@tempb\empty\else
      \@add{|}\line@set#2\\#4\\%
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@add}
% "\line@set" uses "\@add" to tack numbers or vertical bars
% onto the right hand end of "\@nums".
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@add#1{\xdef\@nums{\@nums#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Paragraph decomposition and reassembly}
% \label{paragraph}\relax
%
% In order to be able to count the lines of text and affix line
% numbers, we add an extra stage of processing for each paragraph.
% We send the paragraph into a box
% register, rather than straight onto the vertical list, and when
% the paragraph ends we
% slice the paragraph into its component lines; to each line we
% add any notes or line numbers, add a command to write to the
% line-list, and then at last send the line to the vertical list.
% This section contains all the code for this processing.
%
% \subsection{Boxes, counters, {\tt\protect\bslash pstart}
% and {\tt\protect\bslash pend}}
%
% \begin{macro}{\raw@text}
% \begin{macro}{\ifnumberedpar@}
% \begin{macro}{\numberedpar@true}
% \begin{macro}{\numberedpar@false}
% \begin{macro}{\num@lines}
% \begin{macro}{\one@line}
% \begin{macro}{\par@line}
% Here are numbers and flags that are used internally in the course
% of the paragraph decomposition.
%
% When we first form the paragraph, it goes into a box register,
% "\raw@text", instead of onto the current vertical list.
% The "\ifnumberedpar@" flag will be "true" while a paragraph is
% being processed in that way.
% "\num@lines" will store the number of lines in the paragraph
% when it's complete. When we chop it up into lines, each line
% in turn goes into the
% "\one@line" register, and "\par@line" will be the number
% of that line within the paragraph.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newbox\raw@text
\newif\ifnumberedpar@
\newcount\num@lines
\newbox\one@line
\newcount\par@line
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pstart}
% "\pstart" starts the paragraph by
% clearing the "\inserts@list" list and other
% relevant variables, and then arranges for the
% subsequent text to go into the
% "\raw@text" box. "\pstart" needs to appear at the start of
% every paragraph that's to be numbered; the "\autopar" command below
% may be used to insert these commands automatically.
%
% Beware: everything that occurs between "\pstart" and "\pend"
% is happening within a group; definitions must be global if you want
% them to survive past the end of the paragraph.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pstart{\ifnumbering \else
    \errmessage{\string\pstart\space must be used
                 within a numbered section}%
    \beginnumbering
  \fi
  \ifnumberedpar@
    \errmessage{\string\pstart\space encountered while another
                \string\pstart\space was in effect}%
    \pend
  \fi
  \list@clear{\inserts@list}%
  \global\let\next@insert=\empty
  \begingroup\normal@pars
  \global\setbox\raw@text=\vbox\bgroup
  \numberedpar@true}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pend}
% "\pend" must be used to end a numbered paragraph.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pend{\ifnumbering \else
  \errmessage{\string\pend\space must be used
                  within a numbered section}%
  \fi
  \ifnumberedpar@ \else
    \errmessage{\string\pend\space must follow a \string\pstart}%
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% We set all the usual interline penalties to zero and then immediately
% call "\endgraf" to end the paragraph; this ensures that there'll
% be no large interline penalties to prevent us from slicing the
% paragraph into pieces. These penalties revert to the values
% that you set when the group for the "\vbox" ends. Then we call
% "\do@line" to slice a line off the top of the
% paragraph, add a line number and footnotes, and restore it to the page;
% we keep doing this until there aren't any more lines left.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \brokenpenalty=0 \clubpenalty=0
  \displaywidowpenalty=0 \interlinepenalty=0 \predisplaypenalty=0
  \postdisplaypenalty=0 \widowpenalty=0
  \endgraf\global\num@lines=\prevgraf\egroup
  \global\par@line=0
  \loop\ifvbox\raw@text
     \do@line
  \repeat
%    \end{macrocode}
% Deal with any leftover notes, and then end the group that was begun
% in the "\pstart".
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \flush@notes
  \endgroup
  \ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\autopar}
% In most cases it's only an annoyance to have to label the paragraphs
% to be numbered with "\pstart" and "\pend". "\autopar" will
% do that automatically, allowing you to start a paragraph with its
% first word and no other preliminaries, and to end it with a blank line
% or a "\par" command. The command should be issued within a
% group, after "\beginnumbering" has been used to start the
% numbering; all paragraphs within the group will be affected.
%
% A few situations can cause problems. One is a paragraph that begins with
% a begin-group character or command: "\pstart" will not get invoked
% until after such a group beginning is processed; as a result the
% character that ends the group will be mistaken for the end of the
% "\vbox" that "\pstart" creates, and the rest of the paragraph
% will not be numbered. Such paragraphs need to be started explicitly
% using "\indent", "\noindent", or "\leavevmode"---or "\pstart", since
% you can still include your own "\pstart" and "\pend"
% commands even with "\autopar" on.
%
% Prematurely ending the group within which "\autopar" is in
% effect will cause a similar problem. You must either leave a
% blank line or use "\par" to end the last paragraph before
% you end the group.
%
% The functioning of this macro is more tricky than the usual
% "\everypar": we don't want anything to go onto the vertical
% list at all, so we have to end the paragraph, erase any evidence
% that it ever existed, and start it again using "\pstart".
% We remove the paragraph-indentation box using "\lastbox" and
% save the width, and then skip backwards over the "\parskip"
% that's been added for this paragraph. Then we start again with
% "\pstart", restoring the indentation that we saved, and
% locally change "\par" so that it'll do our "\pend" for us.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\autopar{\ifnumbering \else
    \errmessage{\string\autopar\space must be used
                  within a numbered section}%
    \beginnumbering
  \fi
  \everypar={\setbox0=\lastbox
    \endgraf \vskip-\parskip
    \pstart \noindent \kern\wd0
    \let\par=\pend}%
  \ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\normal@pars}
% We also define a macro which we can rely on to turn off the
% "\autopar" definitions at various important places, if they
% are in force. We'll want to do this within footnotes, for
% example.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\normal@pars{\everypar={}\let\par\endgraf}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Processing one line}
%
% \begin{macro}{\do@line}
% The "\do@line" macro is called by "\pend" to
% do all the processing for a single line of text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\do@line{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% First, pull
% one line off the top of "\raw@text", which contains the remaining
% unprocessed lines of the paragraph. "\vbadness" must be cranked up to
% suppress "Underfull vbox" errors from
% "\vsplit"; "\splittopskip" will be inserted at the top of
% "\one@line", so we zero it. (This skip will appear in the final
% vertical list, just before every "\baselineskip".)
%    \begin{macrocode}
 {\vbadness=10000 \splittopskip=0pt
 \global\setbox\one@line=\vsplit\raw@text to\baselineskip}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% "\one@line" comes out of "\vsplit" as a "vbox";
% we now convert it to an "hbox".
%
% This operation breaks if there's an insert connected to the
% \label{doline} line. In that case, the content of the "vbox"
% "\one@line" before this operation is not just an "hbox": it's
% an "hbox" followed by an insert. After the "\unvbox", the
% last thing on the vertical list is not the "hbox" but the
% insert. The result is that our line heads prematurely onto the
% vertical list---with incorrect interline spacing, because there's
% still a level of boxing that should be undone---and "\one@line"
% is the void box, because the last thing on the vertical list
% wasn't a box. The subsequent code consequently prints a blank
% line.
%
% All this is why insertions need to be kept out of the paragraph
% until this point; our footnote macros add all insertions to list
% macros, and the "\add@inserts" macro below puts them onto the
% vertical list at the proper time.
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \unvbox\one@line \global\setbox\one@line=\lastbox
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Calculate the line and page number for this line.
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \getline@num
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Now we'll add the line to the vertical list, with a line
% number attached if necessary.
%
% The "\hfil\hbox to \wd\one@line" is necessary to position a
% hangindented line correctly: without it, "\one@line" gets
% stretched out to "\hsize" in width and the indentation
% disappears. This is because hanging indentation is done by
% setting a nonzero ``shift'' value for the "hbox" that
% contains the line within the "vbox", and that shift vanishes, like
% the penalties, when we slice up the paragraph; one can examine
% the "\ht" or "\wd" of a box within \TeX{}, but it provides no
% way of examining the "\shift", though it would be a trivial
% modification of the \TeX{} program to add that function.
% ("\parshape"\label{parshape}
% also works by setting a nonzero shift, but this fix isn't good
% enough there, because the total width of the lines is also varied
% in that case; our algorithm will push all the lines of text over
% to the right margin.)
%
% We put the "\new@line" start-of-line marker in the output list at
% this point too: putting it within the "\hbox" here ensures that
% it comes before any of the text of the line in the vertical list,
% but cannot be broken away from it at a page break.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\hbox to \hsize{\affixline@num{%
  \hfil\hbox to \wd\one@line{\new@line\unhbox\one@line}}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Now we pull the footnotes and insertions for this line out of the
% "\inserts@list" list macro and attach them.
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \add@inserts
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Penalties get stripped off by this slicing process; the following
% macro puts them back in as the last step.
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \add@penalties}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Line and page number computation}
%
% \begin{macro}{\getline@num}
% The "\getline@num" macro
% determines the page and line numbers for the line we're about to
% send to the vertical list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\getline@num{%
  \global\advance\absline@num by 1
  \do@actions
  \do@ballast
  \ifsublines@
     \ifnum\sub@lock<2
       \global\advance\subline@num by 1
     \fi
  \else
     \ifnum\@lock<2
       \global\advance\line@num by 1
       \global\subline@num=0
     \fi
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\do@ballast}
% \label{do@ballast}\relax
% The real work in the macro above is done in "\do@actions", but
% before we plunge into that, let's get "\do@ballast" out of the
% way.  This macro looks to see if there is an action to be
% performed on the {\em next\/} line, and if it is going to be a
% page break action, "\do@ballast" decreases the "\ballast@count"
% counter
% by the amount of "\ballast".  This means, in practice, that when
% "\add@penalties" assigns penalties at this point, \TeX\ will be
% given extra encouragement to break the page here (see
% p.\,\pageref{add@penalties}).
%
% \begin{macro}{\ballast}
% \begin{macro}{\ballast@count}
% First we set up the required counters; they are initially
% set to zero, and will remain so unless you say
% "\ballast="\meta{some figure} in your document.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\ballast@count
\newcount\ballast
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% And here is "\do@ballast" itself. It advances "\absline@num"
% within the protection of a group to make its check for what
% happens on the next line.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\do@ballast{\global\ballast@count=0
  \begingroup
    \advance\absline@num by 1
    \ifnum\next@actionline=\absline@num
      \ifnum\next@action>-1001
        \global\advance\ballast@count by -\ballast
       \fi
     \fi
  \endgroup}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\do@actions}
% \begin{macro}{\do@actions@next}
%
% The "\do@actions" macro
% looks at the list of actions to take at particular absolute line
% numbers, and does everything that's specified for the current line.
%
% It may call itself recursively, and to do this efficiently (using
% \TeX's optimization for tail recursion), we define a control-sequence
% called "\do@actions@next" that is always the last thing that
% "\do@actions" does. If there could be more actions to process for
% this line, "\do@actions@next" is set equal to "\do@actions";
% otherwise it's just "\relax".
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\do@actions{%
  \global\let\do@actions@next=\relax
  \ifnum\absline@num<\next@actionline\else
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% First, page number changes, which will generally be the most common
% actions. If we're restarting lineation on each page, this is where it
% happens.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\next@action>-1001
       \global\page@num=\next@action
       \ifbypage@
             \global\line@num=0 \global\subline@num=0
       \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Next, we handle
% commands that change the line-number values. (We subtract $5001$ rather
% than $5000$ here because the line number is going to be incremented
% automatically in "\getline@num".)
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \else
       \ifnum\next@action<-4999
          \@tempcnta=-\next@action
          \advance\@tempcnta by -5001
          \ifsublines@
             \global\subline@num=\@tempcnta
          \else
             \global\line@num=\@tempcnta
          \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% It's one of the fixed codes. We rescale the value in
% "\@tempcnta" so that we can use a case statement.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \else
          \@tempcnta=-\next@action
          \advance\@tempcnta by -1000
          \ifcase\@tempcnta
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Commands that turn sub-lineation on and off.
%    \begin{macrocode}
          \or
             \global\sublines@true
          \or
             \global\sublines@false
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Line locking. We ignore these indications when they don't appear
% at the right times: a start-lock should appear only when locking
% is entirely off, and an end-lock should only appear when locking is
% in the ``middle''.
%    \begin{macrocode}
          \or
             \ifcase\@lock
               \global\@lock=1
             \else
               \global\@lock=0
             \fi
          \or
             \ifnum\@lock=2
               \global\@lock=3
             \else
               \global\@lock=0
             \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Sub-line locking. Same comments as for line locking.
%    \begin{macrocode}
          \or
             \ifcase\sub@lock
               \global\sub@lock=1
             \else
               \global\sub@lock=0
             \fi
          \or
             \ifnum\sub@lock=2
               \global\sub@lock=3
             \else
               \global\sub@lock=0
             \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% If we get here, some unknown action code has been encountered.
%    \begin{macrocode}
          \else
             \edmac@warning{Bad action code,
                                value \next@action.}%
          \fi
       \fi
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Now we get information about the next action off the list,
% and then set "\add@inserts@next" so that we'll
% call ourself recursively: the next action might also be for this
% line.
%
% There's no warning if we find "\actionlines@list" empty,
% since that will always happen near the end of the section.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifx\actionlines@list\empty
         \gdef\next@actionline{1000000}%
    \else
         \gl@p\actionlines@list\to\next@actionline
         \gl@p\actions@list\to\next@action
         \global\let\do@actions@next=\do@actions
    \fi
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Make the recursive call, if necessary.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\do@actions@next}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Line number printing}
%
% \begin{macro}{\affixline@num}
% "\affixline@num" takes a single argument, a series of
% commands for printing the line just split off by "\do@line"; it
% puts that line back on the vertical list, and adds a line number if
% necessary.
%
% To determine whether we need to affix a line number to this line,
% we compute the following:
% \begin{tabbing}
%   \quad $m$ \=  \kill
%   $n$ \> $= \mbox{\it int\/} ( ( \mbox{\it linenum\/} -
%                                \mbox{\it firstlinenum\/} ) /
%                                  \mbox{\it linenumincrement\/} )$ \\
%   $m$ \> $= \mbox{\it firstlinenum\/} +
%                     ( n \times \mbox{\it linenumincrement\/})$
% \end{tabbing}
% (where {\it int\/} truncates a real number to an integer).
% $m$ will be equal to {\it linenum\/} only
% if we're to paste a number on here.
% However, the formula breaks down for the first line to number (and any
% before that), so we check that case separately: if "\line@num" $\le$
% "\firstlinenum", we compare the two directly instead of making these
% calculations.
%
% We compute, in the scratch counter "\@tempcnta", the number
% of the next line that should be printed with a number ($m$ in the
% above discussion), and move the current line number into the
% counter "\@tempcntb" for comparison.
%
% First, the case when we're within a sub-line range.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\affixline@num#1{%
  \ifsublines@
    \@tempcntb=\subline@num
    \ifnum\subline@num>\firstsublinenum
      \@tempcnta=\subline@num
      \advance\@tempcnta by-\firstsublinenum
      \divide\@tempcnta by\sublinenumincrement
      \multiply\@tempcnta by\sublinenumincrement
      \advance\@tempcnta by\firstsublinenum
    \else
      \@tempcnta=\firstsublinenum
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% That takes care of computing the values for comparison, but if line
% number locking is in effect we have to make a further check. If this
% check fails, then we disable the line-number display by setting the
% counters to arbitrary but unequal values.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifcase\sub@lock
      \or
        \ifnum\sublock@disp=1
           \@tempcntb=0 \@tempcnta=1
        \fi
      \or
        \ifnum\sublock@disp=2 \else
           \@tempcntb=0 \@tempcnta=1
        \fi
      \or
        \ifnum\sublock@disp=0
           \@tempcntb=0 \@tempcnta=1
        \fi
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Now the line number case, which works the same way.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \else
    \@tempcntb=\line@num
    \ifnum\line@num>\firstlinenum
       \@tempcnta=\line@num
       \advance\@tempcnta by-\firstlinenum
       \divide\@tempcnta by\linenumincrement
       \multiply\@tempcnta by\linenumincrement
       \advance\@tempcnta by\firstlinenum
    \else
       \@tempcnta=\firstlinenum
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% A locking check for sub-lines, just like the version for line
% numbers above.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifcase\@lock
       \or
         \ifnum\lock@disp=1
            \@tempcntb=0 \@tempcnta=1
         \fi
       \or
         \ifnum\lock@disp=2 \else
            \@tempcntb=0 \@tempcnta=1
         \fi
       \or
         \ifnum\lock@disp=0
            \@tempcntb=0 \@tempcnta=1
         \fi
    \fi
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% The following test is true if we need to print a line number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifnum\@tempcnta=\@tempcntb
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% If we got here,
% we're going to print a line number; so now we need to
% calculate a number that will tell us which side of the page will get
% the line number. We start from "\line@margin", which asks for
% one side always if it's less than $2$; and then if the side does
% depend on the page number, we simply add the page number to this
% side code---because the values of "\line@margin" have been devised so
% that this produces a number that's even for left-margin numbers and
% odd for right-margin numbers.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@tempcntb=\line@margin
    \ifnum\@tempcntb>1
      \advance\@tempcntb by\page@num
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Now print the line ("#1") with its page number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifodd\@tempcntb
      #1\rlap{{\rightlinenum}}%
    \else
      \llap{{\leftlinenum}}#1%
    \fi
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% If no line number is to be appended, we just print the line as is.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    #1%
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Now fix the lock counters, if necessary. A value of $1$ is advanced to
% $2$; $3$ advances to $0$; other values are unchanged.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifcase\@lock
  \or
    \global\@lock=2
  \or \or
    \global\@lock=0
  \fi
  \ifcase\sub@lock
  \or
    \global\sub@lock=2
  \or \or
    \global\sub@lock=0
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Add insertions to the vertical list}
%
% \begin{macro}{\inserts@list}
% "\inserts@list" is the list macro that contains the inserts that
% we save up for one paragraph.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\list@create{\inserts@list}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\add@inserts}
% \begin{macro}{\add@inserts@next}
% "\add@inserts"
% is the penultimate macro used by "\do@line"; it takes
% insertions saved in a list macro and sends them onto the vertical list.
%
% It may call itself recursively, and to do this efficiently (using
% \TeX's optimization for tail recursion), we define a control-sequence
% called "\add@inserts@next" that is always the last thing that
% "\add@inserts" does. If there could be more inserts to process for
% this line, "\add@inserts@next" is set equal to "\add@inserts";
% otherwise it's just "\relax".
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\add@inserts{%
  \global\let\add@inserts@next=\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% If "\inserts@list" is empty, there aren't any more notes or insertions
% for this paragraph, and we needn't waste our time.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\inserts@list\empty \else
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% The "\next@insert" macro records the number of the line that
% receives the next footnote or other insert; it's empty when we start
% out, and just after we've affixed a note or insert.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\next@insert\empty
    \ifx\insertlines@list\empty
      \global\noteschanged@true
      \gdef\next@insert{100000}%
    \else
      \gl@p\insertlines@list\to\next@insert
    \fi
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% If the next insert's for this line, tack it on (and then erase the
% contents of the insert macro, as it could be quite large).
% In that case, we also set "\add@inserts@next" so that we'll
% call ourself recursively: there might be another insert for this same
% line.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifnum\next@insert=\absline@num
    \gl@p\inserts@list\to\@insert
    \@insert
    \global\let\@insert=\undefined
    \global\let\next@insert=\empty
    \global\let\add@inserts@next=\add@inserts
  \fi
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Make the recursive call, if necessary.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\add@inserts@next}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Penalties}
%
% \begin{macro}{\add@penalties}
% "\add@penalties" is
% the last macro used by "\do@line". It adds up the club,
% widow, and interline penalties, and puts a single penalty
% of the appropriate size
% back into the paragraph; these penalties get
% removed by the "\vsplit" operation. "\displaywidowpenalty" and
% "\brokenpenalty" are not restored, since we have no easy way to
% find out where we should insert them.
%
% \label{add@penalties}
% In this code, "\num@lines" is the number of lines in the whole
% paragraph, and "\par@line" is the line we're working on at the
% moment.  The counter "\@tempcnta" is used to calculate and
% accumulate the penalty; it is initially set to the value of
% "\ballast@count", which has been worked out in "\do@ballast"
% above (p.\,\pageref{do@ballast}).  Finally, the penalty is
% checked to see that it doesn't go below $-10000$.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\add@penalties{\@tempcnta=\ballast@count
  \ifnum\num@lines>1
    \global\advance\par@line by 1
    \ifnum\par@line=1
      \advance\@tempcnta by \clubpenalty
    \fi
    \@tempcntb=\par@line \advance\@tempcntb by 1
    \ifnum\@tempcntb=\num@lines
      \advance\@tempcnta by \widowpenalty
    \fi
    \ifnum\par@line<\num@lines
      \advance\@tempcnta by \interlinepenalty
    \fi
  \fi
    \ifnum\@tempcnta=0
      \relax
    \else
      \ifnum\@tempcnta>-10000
        \penalty\@tempcnta
      \else
        \penalty -10000
      \fi
    \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Printing leftover notes}
%
% \begin{macro}{\flush@notes}
% The "\flush@notes"
% macro is called after the entire paragraph has been sliced up
% and sent on to the vertical list.
% If the number of notes to this paragraph has increased since the last
% run of \TeX, then there can be leftover notes that haven't yet been
% printed. An appropriate error message will be printed elsewhere; but
% it's best to go ahead and
% print these notes somewhere, even if it's not in quite the
% right place. What we do is dump them all out here, so that they should
% be printed on the same page as the last line
% of the paragraph. We can hope that's not
% too far from the proper location, to which they'll move on the next
% run.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\flush@notes{%
  \@xloop
    \ifx\inserts@list\empty \else
      \gl@p\inserts@list\to\@insert
      \@insert
      \global\let\@insert=\undefined
  \repeat}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xloop}
% "\@xloop" is
% a variant of the \PlainTeX\ "\loop" macro, useful when it's
% hard to construct a positive test using the \TeX\ "\if" commands---as
% in "\flush@notes" above. One says "\@xloop" "..." "\if" "..." "\else"
% "..." "\repeat", and the action following "\else" is repeated as long
% as the "\if" test fails. (This macro will work wherever the \PlainTeX\
% "\loop" is used, too, so we could just call it "\loop";
% but it seems preferable not to change the definitions of any of
% the standard macros.)
%
% This variant of "\loop" was introduced by
% Alois Kabelschacht\index{Kabelschacht, Alois} in
% {\em TUGboat\/} {\bf 8} (1987), pp.\,184--5.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xloop#1\repeat{%
  \def\body{#1\expandafter\body\fi}%
  \body}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Footnotes}
% \label{footnotes}\relax
%
% The footnote macros are adapted from those in \PlainTeX, but they
% differ in these respects: the outer-level commands must add other
% commands to a list macro rather than doing insertions immediately;
% there are five separate levels of footnotes, not just one; and there
% are options to reformat footnotes into paragraphs or into multiple
% columns.
%
% \subsection{Fonts (using the Plain font selection scheme)}
% \label{fontcode}\relax
% Before getting into the details of formatting the notes, we set
% up some font macros. It is the notes that present the greatest
% challenge for our font-handling mechanism, because we need to be
% able to take fragments of our main text and print them in
% different forms: it is common to reduce the size,
% for example, without otherwise changing the fonts used.
%
% "EDMAC" supports two different systems for
% font handling: the ``Plain font selection scheme'', that is,
% the original \PlainTeX\ system, with some minor
% extensions needed for our purposes here; and the New Font Selection
% Scheme (NFSS) of Frank Mittelbach\index{Mittelbach, Frank} and Rainer
% Sch\"opf\index{Sch\"opf, Rainer}, as adapted for use with \PlainTeX\
% by Wayne Sullivan\index{Sullivan, Wayne}. The NFSS is strongly
% recommended, but the Plain font selection scheme will suffice for
% simple applications.
%
% "EDMAC" will define different versions of the following
% macros, depending on which scheme is used: "\edfont@info",
% "\notefontsetup", "\notenumfont", "\numlabfont", and
% "\select@lemmafont". If the Plain font selection
% scheme is chosen, "EDMAC" will also define an "\eightpoint"
% macro and load additional Computer Modern fonts for use with it.
%
% The choice of a font selection scheme is made implicitly. If NFSS
% has been loaded, it is assumed that you want to use it; otherwise
% "EDMAC" uses the Plain font selection scheme. If you're using NFSS,
% load it and make any choices of customizations and standard settings
% before you load "EDMAC".
%
% We know that NFSS has been loaded if the "\selectfont" macro is
% present.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\selectfont\undefined
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% The rest of this section defines macros for use with the Plain
% font selection scheme; see the next section for definitions used
% with NFSS.
%
% What we want to provide with these macros is something a little bit
% more general than \PlainTeX, without going the whole way to
% implementing a full, planned font scheme.
%
% \begin{macro}{\notefontsetup}
% The font setup defined in "\notefontsetup" defines the
% fonts which will normally be used
% for the text of the footnotes.  Parts of the footnote, such
% as the line number references and the lemma, are enclosed in
% groups, with their own font macros, so a note in plain roman can
% still have line numbers in bold, say, and the lemma in the same
% family of font as in the main text.
%
% Since it is common to have notes in a font smaller than
% the main text, we set up an "\eightpoint" macro which contains
% definitions for smaller versions of "\rm", "\it",
% "\bf", "\tt", and "\sl".  It also contains
% definitions of the appropriate "\fam" for each of these
% styles, as well as a smaller "\strutbox" and a setting of
% the "\baselineskip".
%
% If you want to change the size or style of the standard footnote
% font, it is important that your macro define at least these
% items:
% \begin{itemize}\addtolength{\itemsep}{-1ex}
% \item fonts
% \item "\fam"(s)
% \item "\strutbox"
% \item "\baselineskip"
% \end{itemize}
% For example, like \PlainTeX\ itself, "EDMAC" uses the height of a
% "\strutbox" in a few crucial places, such as the crop marks,
% the alignment of the top line of footnotes, etc. (Page
% \pageref{magic} explains the reasons why this is important in one
% instance.)  If you change the size of your fonts, but don't
% change the size of the "\strutbox" too, then there will be
% various discrepancies in the spacing.  The same holds for the
% "\baselineskip", and the other macros mentioned here.
%
% The size of a "\strutbox" for the standard ten-point fonts
% is already set by \PlainTeX, as are the other quantities.  This
% takes care of the "\headlinefont", since this is initially set to ten-point
% "\rm".  But once again, if you change the font of
% the headline, be sure to add appropriate definitions of
% "\baselineskip" and "\strutbox" too.
%
% The first thing, then, is to load some font metric information
% for the small fonts that \PlainTeX\ doesn't load (cf.\ {\em The
% \TeX book}, pp.\,413--415).  (We load eight-point fonts where we
% should load six-point ones, because the normal \TeX\ distributions
% don't have "cmtt6" etc.  If you have them, you may want to create
% your own "\eightpoint" with proper definitions.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \font\eightrm=cmr8 \font\eighti=cmmi8  \skewchar\eighti='177
  \font\eightsy=cmsy8 \skewchar\eightsy='60 \font\eightbf=cmbx8
  \font\eighttt=cmtt8 \hyphenchar\eighttt=-1 % inhibit hyphenation
  \font\eightsl=cmsl8 \font\eightit=cmti8
  \font\sixrm=cmr8  \font\sixi=cmmi8    \skewchar\sixi='177
  \font\sixsy=cmsy8 \skewchar\sixsy='60 \font\sixbf=cmbx8
  \font\sixtt=cmtt8 \hyphenchar\sixtt=-1 % inhibit hyphenation
  \font\sixsl=cmsl8 \font\sixit=cmti8
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\eightpoint}
% \label{eightpoint}\relax
% With that out of the way, we can now define an "\eightpoint"
% macro that is taken almost directly from p.\,415 of {\em The \TeX
% book\/} (can you spot the differences?).
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\eightpoint{\def\rm{\fam0\eightrm}%
    \textfont0=\eightrm \scriptfont0=\sixrm
                        \scriptscriptfont0=\fiverm
    \textfont1=\eighti  \scriptfont1=\sixi
                        \scriptscriptfont1=\fivei
    \textfont2=\eightsy \scriptfont2=\sixsy
                        \scriptscriptfont2=\fivesy
    \textfont3=\tenex   \scriptfont3=\tenex
                        \scriptscriptfont3=\tenex
    \def\it{\fam\itfam\eightit}\textfont\itfam=\eightit
    \def\sl{\fam\slfam\eightsl}\textfont\slfam=\eightsl
    \def\bf{\fam\bffam\eightbf}\textfont\bffam=\eightbf
    \scriptfont\bffam=\sixbf \scriptscriptfont\bffam=\fivebf
    \def\tt{\fam\ttfam\eighttt}\textfont\ttfam=\eighttt
    \normalbaselineskip=9pt
    \setbox\strutbox=\hbox{\vrule height7pt depth2pt width0pt}%
    \normalbaselines\rm}
%    \end{macrocode}
% And finally, we set "\notefontsetup" to be the new font setup
% macro:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\notefontsetup=\eightpoint
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% With the above macros, remember to use "\eightpoint" (alias
% "\notefontsetup") inside a group.  If you want to use it
% outside a group, you will need to define a "\tenpoint" macro
% to set all these definitions back to the standard ten-point settings of
% \PlainTeX.
%
% \begin{macro}{\notenumfont}
% The macro controlling the font for line numbers
% within notes, "\notenumfont", is
% more simple.  It really is just a font call.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\notenumfont=\sevenrm
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\select@lemmafont}
% \label{selectlemmafont}\relax
% "\select@lemmafont" is provided to set the right font for
% the lemma in a note. This macro extracts the font-family number
% from the line and page number cluster, and issues the associated
% font-changing command, so that the lemma is printed in its
% original font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\select@lemmafont#1|#2|#3|#4|#5|#6|#7|{%
     \ifcase#7
        \rm \or \rm \or \rm \or \rm           % families 0--3
            \or \it \or \sl \or \bf \or \tt   % families 4--7
            \else \rm
     \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Note that this is a departure from the normal behavior of
% \PlainTeX\ regarding font selection.
% As Donald Knuth remarks ({\em The
% \TeX book}, p.\,154), the "\fam" value is usually irrelevant
% when \TeX\ is typesetting text in horizontal mode; "\fam"
% only matters in math mode.  But here we are using the
% "\fam" value as a convenient way to select a font group.  If
% you are editing a text in some other font, say Cyrillic, be sure
% to assign it a font "\fam", and add that to the list here in
% "\select@lemmafont" (see the example given on p.\,\pageref{fam-fiddle}
% below for using a Sanskrit font with "EDMAC").
%  The ideal in this situation would be to be
% able to test for such parameters such as font series, style, and
% size.  Exactly those
% capabilities are provided in the New Font Selection Scheme
% written by Frank Mittelbach\index{Mittelbach, Frank} and Rainer
% Sch\"opf,\index{Sch\"opf, Rainer}
% and this is one place in "EDMAC" where
% such a system can be used to good effect (see the discussion
% above, page \pageref{edmacnfss}, and the following section).
%
% \subsection{Fonts: using the New Font Selection Scheme}
%
% These are the font macros used with NFSS.  They will be activated if
% the NFSS macros have been loaded as described above
% (p.\,\pageref{ed-nfss}).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\else
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\notefontsetup}
% The font setup defined in "\notefontsetup" defines the standard
% fonts for the text of the footnotes.  Parts of the footnote, such
% as the line number references and the lemma, are enclosed in
% groups, with their own font macros, so a note in plain roman can
% still have line numbers in bold, say, and the lemma in the same
% font encoding, family, series, and shape
% of font as in the main text. Typically this definition should
% specify only a size. It should always end with "\selectfont" or
% with a command like "\rm" that does a "\selectfont".
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\notefontsetup{\fontsize{8}{9pt}\selectfont}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\notenumfont}
% The line numbers will be printed using the font selected by
% executing "\notenumfont".
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\notenumfont{\fontsize{7}{8pt}\rm}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\select@lemmafont}
% \begin{macro}{\select@@lemmafont}
% "\select@lemmafont" is provided to set the right font for
% the lemma in a note. This macro extracts the font specifier
% from the line and page number cluster, and issues the associated
% font-changing command, so that the lemma is printed in its
% original font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\select@lemmafont#1|#2|#3|#4|#5|#6|#7|{\select@@lemmafont#7|}
  \def\select@@lemmafont#1/#2/#3/#4|%
    {\fontencoding{#1}\fontfamily{#2}\fontseries{#3}\fontshape{#4}%
    \selectfont}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% This is the end of the conditional section for font macro definition.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Outer-level footnote commands}
% \begin{macro}{\Afootnote}
% The outer-level footnote commands will look familiar: they're
% just called "\Afootnote", "\Bfootnote", etc., instead of
% plain "\footnote". What they do, however, is quite different,
% since they have to operate in conjunction with "\text" when
% numbering is in effect.
%
% If we're within a line-numbered paragraph, then, we tack this note onto
% the "\inserts@list" list, and increment the deferred-page-bottom-note
% counter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Afootnote#1{%
  \ifnumberedpar@
    \xright@appenditem{\noexpand\vAfootnote{A}%
                   {{\@nums}{\@tag}{#1}}}\to\inserts@list
    \global\advance\insert@count by 1
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Within free text, there's no need to put off making the insertion
% for this note. No line numbers are available, so this isn't generally
% that useful; but you might want to use it to get around some
% limitation of "EDMAC".
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \else
    \vAfootnote{A}{{0|0|0|0|0|0|0}{}{#1}}%
  \fi\ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Bfootnote}
% \begin{macro}{\Cfootnote}
% \begin{macro}{\Dfootnote}
% \begin{macro}{\Efootnote}
% We need similar commands for the other footnote series.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Bfootnote#1{%
  \ifnumberedpar@
    \xright@appenditem{\noexpand\vBfootnote{B}%
                   {{\@nums}{\@tag}{#1}}}\to\inserts@list
    \global\advance\insert@count by 1
  \else
    \vBfootnote{B}{{0|0|0|0|0|0|0}{}{#1}}%
  \fi\ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Cfootnote#1{%
  \ifnumberedpar@
    \xright@appenditem{\noexpand\vCfootnote{C}%
                   {{\@nums}{\@tag}{#1}}}\to\inserts@list
    \global\advance\insert@count by 1
  \else
    \vCfootnote{C}{{0|0|0|0|0|0|0}{}{#1}}%
  \fi\ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Dfootnote#1{%
  \ifnumberedpar@
    \xright@appenditem{\noexpand\vDfootnote{D}%
                   {{\@nums}{\@tag}{#1}}}\to\inserts@list
    \global\advance\insert@count by 1
  \else
    \vDfootnote{D}{{0|0|0|0|0|0|0}{}{#1}}%
  \fi\ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Efootnote#1{%
  \ifnumberedpar@
    \xright@appenditem{\noexpand\vEfootnote{E}%
                   {{\@nums}{\@tag}{#1}}}\to\inserts@list
    \global\advance\insert@count by 1
  \else
    \vEfootnote{E}{{0|0|0|0|0|0|0}{}{#1}}%
  \fi\ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Normal footnote formatting}
%
% The processing of each note is done
% by four principal macros: the "vfootnote" macro takes the text
% of the footnote and does the "\insert"; it calls on the
% "footfmt" macro to select the right fonts, print the line
% number and lemma, and do any other formatting needed for that individual
% note. Within the output routine, the two other macros, "footstart"
% and "footgroup", are called; the first prints extra vertical
% space and a footnote rule, if desired; the second does any reformatting
% of the whole set of footnotes in this series for this page---such
% as paragraphing or division into columns---and then sends them to the
% page.
%
% These four macros, and the other macros and parameters shown
% here, are distinguished by the ``series letter''
% that indicates which set of footnotes
% we're dealing with---"A", "B", "C", "D", or "E".
% The series letter always precedes the string "foot" in macro
% and parameter names. Hence, for the "A" series, the four macros
% are called "\vAfootnote", "\Afootfmt", "\Afootstart",
% and "\Afootgroup".
%
% \begin{macro}{\normalvfootnote}
% We now begin a series of commands that do ``normal'' footnote
% formatting: a format much like that implemented
% in \PlainTeX{}, in which each footnote
% is a separate paragraph.
%
% "\normalvfootnote" takes the series letter as "#1",
% and the entire text of the footnote is "#2". It does the
% "\insert" for this note, calling on the "footfmt" macro for
% this note series to format the text of the note.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\normalvfootnote#1#2{\insert\csname #1footins\endcsname\bgroup
  \notefontsetup
  \interlinepenalty\csname inter#1footnotelinepenalty\endcsname
  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox
  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty\@MM
  \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\z@skip
  \spaceskip\z@skip \xspaceskip\z@skip
  \csname #1footfmt\endcsname #2\egroup}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\normalfootfmt}
% \label{normalfootfmt}\relax
% "\normalfootfmt" is a ``normal'' macro
% to take the footnote line and page
% number information (see p.\,\pageref{linenumbers}), and the
% desired text, and output what's to be printed.
% Argument "#1" contains the line and page number information
% and lemma font specifier;
% "#2" is the lemma;
% "#3" is the note's text. This version is very
% rudimentary---it uses "\printlines"
% to print just the range of line numbers,
% followed by a square bracket, the lemma, and the note text;
% it's intended to be copied and modified as necessary.
%
% "\par" should always be redefined to "\endgraf" within
% the format macro (this is what "\normal@pars" does),
% to override any tricky stuff which might be done in the main text
% to get the lines numbered automatically (as set up by
% "\autopar", for example).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\normalfootfmt#1#2#3{%
  \normal@pars
  \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
  {\notenumfont\printlines#1|}\strut\enspace
      {\select@lemmafont#1|#2}\rbracket\enskip#3\strut\par}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endashchar}
% \begin{macro}{\fullstop}
% \begin{macro}{\rbracket}
% The fonts that are used for printing notes might not have the
% character mapping we expect: for example, the Computer Modern font
% that contains old-style numerals does not contain an en-dash or
% square brackets, and its period and comma are in odd locations.
% To allow use of the standard footnote macros with such fonts, we use
% the following macros for certain characters.
%
% The "\endashchar" macro is simply an en-dash from a
% "\rm" font that is immune to changes in the surrounding
% font.  The same goes for the full stop.  These two are used in
% "\printlines".  The right bracket macro is the same again;
% it crops up in "\normalfootfmt" and the other footnote
% macros for controlling the format of footnotes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\endashchar{{\rm--}}
\def\fullstop{{\rm.}}
\def\rbracket{{\rm\thinspace]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printlines}
% The "\printlines" macro prints the line
% numbers for a note---which, in the
% general case, is a rather complicated task.
% The seven parameters of the
% argument are the line numbers as stored in "\@nums", in the
% form described on page \pageref{linenumbers}: the starting
% page, line, and sub-line numbers, followed by the ending page,
% line, and sub-line numbers, and then the font specifier for
% the lemma.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@pnum}
% \begin{macro}{\@ssub}
% \begin{macro}{\@elin}
% \begin{macro}{\@esl}
% \begin{macro}{\@dash}
% To simplify the logic, we use a lot of counters to tell us which
% numbers need to get printed (using $1$ for yes, $0$ for no, so
% that "\ifodd" tests for ``yes''). The counter assignments are:
% \begin{itemize}\addtolength{\itemsep}{-1ex}
% \item "\@pnum" for page numbers;
% \item "\@ssub" for starting sub-line;
% \item "\@elin" for ending line;
% \item "\@esl" for ending sub-line; and
% \item "\@dash" for the dash between the starting and ending groups.
% \end{itemize}
% There's no counter for the line number because it's always printed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\@pnum \newcount\@ssub \newcount\@elin
\newcount\@esl  \newcount\@dash
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% First of all, we print the page numbers only if\/: 1)~we're doing
% the lineation by page, and 2)~the ending page number is different
% from the starting page number.\label{printlines}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\printlines#1|#2|#3|#4|#5|#6|#7|{\begingroup
  \@pnum=0 \@dash=0
  \ifbypage@
     \ifnum#4=#1 \else
        \@pnum=1
        \@dash=1
     \fi
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% We print the ending line number if\/: 1)~we're printing the ending
% page number, or 2)~it's different from the starting line number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@elin=\@pnum
  \ifnum#2=#5 \else
      \@elin=1
      \@dash=1
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% We print the starting sub-line if it's nonzero.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@ssub=0
  \ifnum#3=0 \else
      \@ssub=1
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% We print the ending sub-line if it's nonzero and: 1)~it's different
% from the starting sub-line number, or 2)~the ending line number is
% being printed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@esl=0
  \ifnum#6=0 \else
      \ifnum#6=#3
         \@esl=\@elin
      \else
         \@esl=1
         \@dash=1
      \fi
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Now we're ready to print it all, based on our counter values. The
% only subtlety left here is when to print a period between
% numbers. But the only instance in which this is tricky is for the
% ending sub-line number: it could be coming after the starting
% sub-line number (in which case we want only the dash) or after an
% ending line number (in which case we need to insert a period).
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifodd\@pnum #1\fullstop\fi
  #2%
  \ifodd\@ssub \fullstop #3\fi
  \ifodd\@dash \endashchar\fi
  \ifodd\@pnum #4\fullstop\fi
  \ifodd\@elin #5\fi
  \ifodd\@esl \ifodd\@elin\fullstop\fi #6\fi
\endgroup}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\normalfootstart}
% \label{normalvalues}\relax
% "\normalfootstart"
% is a standard footnote-starting macro, called in the output
% routine whenever there are footnotes of this series to be
% printed: it skips a bit and then draws a rule.
%
% Any "footstart" macro must put onto the page something that
% takes up space exactly equal to the "\skip\footins" value for
% the associated series of notes. \TeX\ makes page computations based
% on that "\skip" value, and the output pages will suffer from
% spacing problems if what you add takes up a different amount of
% space.
%
% The "\leftskip" and "\rightskip" values
% are both zeroed here.\label{footskips}
% Similarly, these skips are cancelled in the "vfootnote" macros
% for the various types of notes. Strictly speaking,
% this is necessary only
% if you are using paragraphed footnotes, but we have put it here
% and in the other "vfootnote" macros too so that the behavior of
% "EDMAC" in this respect is general across all footnote types
% (you can change this).  What this means is that any "\leftskip"
% and "\rightskip" you specify applies to the main text, but not
% the footnotes.  The footnotes continue to be of width "\hsize".
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\normalfootstart#1{%
  \vskip\skip\csname #1footins\endcsname
  \leftskip0pt \rightskip0pt
  \csname #1footnoterule\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\normalfootnoterule}
% "\normalfootnoterule" is
% a standard footnote-rule macro, for use by a "footstart"
% macro: just the same as the \PlainTeX\ footnote rule.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\normalfootnoterule=\footnoterule
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\normalfootgroup}
% "\normalfootgroup" is
% a standard footnote-grouping macro: it sends the
% contents of the footnote-insert box to the output page without
% alteration.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\normalfootgroup#1{\unvbox\csname #1footins\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Standard footnote definitions}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footnormal}
% We can now define all the parameters for the five series of
% footnotes; initially they use the ``normal'' footnote formatting,
% which is set up by calling "\footnormal".
% You can switch to another type of formatting by using
% "\footparagraph", "\foottwocol", or "\footthreecol".
%
% Switching to a variation of ``normal''
% formatting requires changing the
% quantities defined in "\footnormal".  The best way to
% proceed would be to make a copy of this macro, with a different
% name, make your desired changes in that copy, and then invoke it,
% giving it the letter of the footnote series you wish to control.
%
% (We have not defined baseline skip values like
% "\abaselineskip", since this is one of the quantities set in
% "\notefontsetup".)
%
% What we want to do here is to say something like the following
% for each footnote series. (This is an example, not part of the
% actual "EDMAC" code.)
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newinsert\Afootins
% \newcount\interAfootnotelinepenalty \interAfootnotelinepenalty=100
% \skip\Afootins=12pt plus5pt minus5pt
% \count\Afootins=1000
% \dimen\Afootins=0.8\vsize
% \let\vAfootnote=\normalvfootnote  \let\Afootfmt=\normalfootfmt
% \let\Afootstart=\normalfootstart  \let\Afootgroup=\normalfootgroup
% \let\Afootnoterule=\normalfootnoterule
% \end{verbatim}
% Instead of repeating ourselves, we define a "\footnormal"
% macro that makes all these assignments for us, for any given
% series letter.  This also makes it easy to change from any
% different system of formatting back to the "normal" setting.
%
% We begin by defining the five new insertion classes, and some
% "count" registers; these are "\outer" operations that
% can't be done inside "\footnormal".
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newinsert\Afootins \newinsert\Bfootins
\newinsert\Cfootins \newinsert\Dfootins
\newinsert\Efootins
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\interAfootnotelinepenalty
\newcount\interBfootnotelinepenalty
\newcount\interCfootnotelinepenalty
\newcount\interDfootnotelinepenalty
\newcount\interEfootnotelinepenalty
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now we set up the "\footnormal" macro itself.  It takes
% one argument: the footnote series letter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\footnormal#1{%
  \csname inter#1footnotelinepenalty\endcsname=100
  \expandafter\let\csname #1footstart\endcsname=\normalfootstart
  \expandafter\let\csname v#1footnote\endcsname=\normalvfootnote
  \expandafter\let\csname #1footfmt\endcsname=\normalfootfmt
  \expandafter\let\csname #1footgroup\endcsname=\normalfootgroup
  \expandafter\let\csname #1footnoterule\endcsname=%
                                             \normalfootnoterule
  \count\csname #1footins\endcsname=1000
  \dimen\csname #1footins\endcsname=0.8\vsize
  \skip\csname #1footins\endcsname=12pt plus6pt minus6pt}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Some of these values deserve comment: the "\dimen"
% setting allows 80\% of the page to be occupied by notes;  the
% "\skip" setting is deliberately flexible, since pages with
% lots of notes attached to many of the lines can be a bit hard
% for \TeX\ to make.
%
% And finally, we initialize the formatting for all the footnote series
% to be normal.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\footnormal{A}
\footnormal{B}
\footnormal{C}
\footnormal{D}
\footnormal{E}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{Paragraphed footnotes}
%
% The paragraphed-footnote option
% reformats all the footnotes of one series for a page into
% a single paragraph; this is especially appropriate when the notes are
% numerous and brief. The code is based
% on {\em The \TeX book}, pp.\,398--400, with
% alterations for our environment. This algorithm uses a considerable
% amount of save-stack space: a \TeX\ of ordinary size may not be able
% to handle more than about $100$ notes of this kind on a page.
%
% \begin{macro}{\footparagraph}
% The "\footparagraph" macro
% sets up everything for one series of footnotes so that
% they'll be paragraphed; it takes the series letter as argument.
% We include the setting of "\count\footins" to $1000$ for the
% footnote series just in case you are switching to paragraphed
% footnotes after having columnar ones, since they change this
% value (see below).
%
% It is important to call "\footparagraph" only after
% "\hsize" has been set for the pages that use
% this series of notes; otherwise \TeX\ will try to put too
% many or too few of these notes on each page. If you need to
% change the "\hsize" within the document, call
% "\footparagraph" again afterwards to take account of the new
% value.  The argument of "\footparagraph" is the letter
% ("A"--"E") denoting the series of notes to be paragraphed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\footparagraph#1{%
  \expandafter\let\csname #1footstart\endcsname=\parafootstart
  \expandafter\let\csname v#1footnote\endcsname=\para@vfootnote
  \expandafter\let\csname #1footfmt\endcsname=\parafootfmt
  \expandafter\let\csname #1footgroup\endcsname=\para@footgroup
  \count\csname #1footins\endcsname=1000
  \para@footsetup{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\para@footsetup}
% "\footparagraph" calls the
% "\para@footsetup" macro to calculate a special
% fudge factor, which is the ratio of the "\baselineskip"
% to the "\hsize". We assume that the proper value of
% "\baselineskip" for the footnotes (normally 9\,pt) has been set
% already, in "\notefontsetup".  The argument of the macro is
% again the note series letter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\para@footsetup#1{{\notefontsetup
  \dimen0=\baselineskip
  \multiply\dimen0 by 1024
  \divide \dimen0 by \hsize \multiply\dimen0 by 64
  \expandafter
  \xdef\csname #1footfudgefactor\endcsname{%
    \expandafter\en@number\the\dimen0 }}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\en@number}
% The "\en@number" macro extracts the numerical part from a "dimen"
% register and strips off the ``"pt"'' (see {\em The \TeX
% book}, p.\,375).  It turns "10pt" into "10" so that you can use
% it in arithmetic.
%    \begin{macrocode}
{\catcode`p=12 \catcode`t=12 \gdef\en@number#1pt{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\parafootstart}
% "\parafootstart" is the same as "\normalfootstart", but we give it
% again to ensure that "\rightskip" and "\leftskip" are
% zeroed (this needs to be done before "\para@footgroup" in the
% output routine).  You might have decided to change this for other
% kinds of note, but here it should stay as it is.  The size of
% paragraphed notes is calculated using a fudge factor which in
% turn is based on "\hsize".  So the paragraph of notes needs to be
% that wide.
%
% The argument of the macro is again the note series letter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\parafootstart#1{%
  \rightskip=0pt \leftskip=0pt \parindent=0pt
  \vskip\skip\csname #1footins\endcsname
  \csname #1footnoterule\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\para@vfootnote}
% "\para@vfootnote"
% is a version of the "\vfootnote" command that's used for
% paragraphed notes.  It gets appended to the "\inserts@list" list
% by an outer-level footnote command like "\Afootnote".  The first
% argument is the note series letter; the second is the full text
% of the printed note itself, including line numbers, lemmata, and
% footnote text.
%
% The initial model for this insertion is, of course, the
% "\insert\footins" definition in {\em The \TeX book}, p.\,398.
% There, the footnotes are first collected up in hboxes, and these
% hboxes are later unpacked and stuck together into a paragraph.
%
% However, Michael Downes\index{Downes, Michael} has pointed out
% that because text in hboxes gets typeset in restricted horizontal
% mode, there are some undesirable side-effects if you later want
% to break such text across lines.  In restricted horizontal mode,
% where \TeX\ does not expect to have to break lines, it does not
% insert certain items like "\discretionary"s. If you later unbox
% these hboxes and stick them together, as the {\em \TeX book\/}
% macros do to make these footnotes, you lose the ability to
% hyphenate after an explicit hyphen.  This can lead to overfull
% "\hbox"es when you would not expect to find them, and to the
% uninitiated it might be very hard to see why the problem had
% arisen.\footnote{Michael Downes, ``Line Breaking in {\tt \bslash
% unhbox}ed Text'', {\em TUGboat\/} {\bf 11} (1990), pp.\,605--612.}
%
% Wayne Sullivan\index{Sullivan, Wayne} pointed out to us another
% subtle problem that arises from the same cause: \TeX\ also leaves
% the "\language" whatsit nodes out of the horizontal
% list.\footnote{See {\em The \TeX book}, p.\,455 (editions after
% January 1990).}  So changes from one language to another will not
% invoke the proper hyphenation rules in such footnotes.  Since
% critical editions often do deal with several languages,
% especially in footnotes, we really ought to get this bit of code
% right.
%
% To get around these problems, Wayne suggested emendations to the
% {\em \TeX book\/} versions of these macros which are broadly the
% same as those described by Michael: the central idea (also
% suggested by Donald Knuth in a letter to Michael) is to avoid collecting
% the text in an "\hbox" in the first place, but instead to collect
% it in a "\vbox" whose width is (virtually)
% infinite.\label{hboxproblem} The text is therefore typeset in
% unrestricted horizontal mode, as a paragraph consisting of a
% single long line.  Later, there is an extra level of unboxing to
% be done: we have to unpack the "\vbox", as well as the hboxes
% inside it, but that's not too hard.  For details, we refer you to
% Michael's article, where the issues are clearly
% explained.\footnote{Wayne supplied his own macros to do this, but
% since they were almost identical to Michael's, we have used the
% latter's {\tt \bslash unvxh} macro since it is publicly
% documented.}  Michael's unboxing macro is called "\unvxh": unvbox,
% extract the last line, and unhbox it.
%
% Doing things this way has an important
% consequence:\label{nobreaks-detail} as Michael
% pointed out, you really can't put an explicit line-break into a
% note built in a "\vbox" the way we are doing.\footnote{``Line
% Breaking'', p.\,610.}  In other words, be very careful not to say
% "\break", or "\penalty-10000", or any equivalent inside your
% para-footnote.\label{nobreak}  If you do, most of the note will
% probably disappear.  You {\em are\/} allowed to make strong
% suggestions; in fact "\penalty-9999" will be quite okay.  Just
% don't make the break mandatory.  We haven't applied any of
% Michael's solutions here, since we feel that the problem is
% exiguous, and "EDMAC" is quite baroque enough already.  If
% you think you are having this problem, look up Michael's
% solutions.
%
% One more thing; we set "\leftskip" and "\rightskip" to zero.
% This has the effect of neutralizing any such skips which may
% apply to the main text (cf.\ p.\,\pageref{footskips} above).
% We need to do this, since "footfudgefactor" is calculated on
% the assumption that the notes are "\hsize" wide.
%
% So, finally, here is the modified foot-paragraph code, which
% sets the footnote in vertical mode so that language and
% discretionary nodes are included.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\para@vfootnote#1#2{\insert\csname #1footins\endcsname
  \bgroup
    \notefontsetup
    \interlinepenalty=\csname inter#1footnotelinepenalty\endcsname
    \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox
    \splitmaxdepth=\dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty=\@MM
    \leftskip0pt \rightskip0pt
    \setbox0=\vbox{\hsize=\maxdimen
      \noindent\csname #1footfmt\endcsname#2}%
    \setbox0=\hbox{\unvxh0}%
    \dp0=0pt
    \ht0=\csname #1footfudgefactor\endcsname\wd0
%    \end{macrocode}
% Here we produce the contents of the footnote from box $0$, and
% add a penalty of $0$ between boxes in this insert.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \box0
    \penalty0
  \egroup}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The final penalty of $0$
% was added here at Wayne's\index{Sullivan, Wayne}
% suggestion to avoid a weird page-breaking problem, which occurs on
% those occasions when \TeX\ attempts to split foot paragraphs.
% After trying out such a split (see {\em The \TeX book}, p.\,124),
% \TeX\ inserts a penalty of $-10000$ here, which
% nearly always forces the break at the end of the whole footnote
% paragraph (since individual notes can't be split) even when this
% leads to an overfull vbox.  The change above results in a penalty
% of $0$ instead which allows, but doesn't force, such breaks. This
% penalty of $0$ is later removed, after page breaks have been
% decided, by the "\unpenalty" macro in "\makehboxofhboxes". So it
% does not affect how the footnote paragraphs are typeset (the
% notes still have a penalty of $-10$ between them, which is added
% by "\parafootfmt").
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\unvxh}
% Here is Michael's\index{Downes, Michael} definition of "\unvxh",
% used above.  Michael's macro also takes care to remove some
% unwanted penalties and glue that \TeX\ automatically attaches to
% the end of paragraphs.  When \TeX\ finishes a paragraph, it
% throws away any remaining glue, and then tacks on the following
% items: a "\penalty" of $10000$, a "\parfillskip" and a
% "\rightskip" ({\em The \TeX book}, pp.\,99--100).  "\unvxh"
% cancels these unwanted paragraph-final items using "\unskip" and
% "\unpenalty".
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\unvxh#1{%
  \setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox#1%
    \global\setbox1=\lastbox}%
  \unhbox1
  \unskip            % remove \rightskip,
  \unskip            % remove \parfillskip,
  \unpenalty         % remove \penalty of 10000,
  \hskip\ipn@skip}   % but add the glue to go between the notes
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\interparanoteglue}
% \begin{macro}{\ipn@skip}
% \label{interparanoteglue}\relax
% Close observers will notice that we snuck some glue called
% "\ipn@skip" onto the end of the hbox produced by "\unvxh" in the
% above macro.
%
% We want to be able to have some glue between our paragraphed
% footnotes. But since we are initially setting our notes in
% internal vertical mode, as little paragraphs, any paragraph-final
% glue will get discarded.  Since "\unvxh" is already busy fiddling
% with glue and penalties at the end of these paragraphs, we take
% advantage of the opportunity to provide our inter-note spacing.
%
% We collect the value of the inter-parafootnote glue value as the
% parameter of a macro called---wait for it---"\interparanoteglue".
% We put this value into the value of a glue register
% "\ipn@skip" (inter-para-note-skip) making sure first to set the
% current font to the value normally used in footnotes so that the value of an
% "em" will be taken from the right font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newskip\ipn@skip
\def\interparanoteglue#1{%
             {\notefontsetup\global\ipn@skip=#1 \relax}}
\interparanoteglue{1em plus.4em minus.4em}
%    \end{macrocode}
% There is a point to be careful about regarding the
% "\interparanoteglue".  Remember that in "\para@vfootnote" we do
% some measurements on the footnote box, and use the resulting size
% to make an estimate of how much the note will contribute to the
% height of our final footnote paragraph.  This information is used
% by the output routine to allocate the right amount of vertical
% space on the page for the notes ({\em The \TeX book}, pp.\,398--399).
%
% The length of the footnote includes the natural size of the glue
% specified by "\interparanoteglue", but not its stretch or shrink
% components, since at this point the note has no need to stretch
% or shrink. Later, when the paragraph is actually composed by
% "\parafootgroup" in the output routine, \TeX\ will almost
% certainly do some stretching and shrinking of this glue in order
% to make the paragraph look nice. Probably the stretching and
% shrinking over the whole paragraph will cancel each other out.
% But if not, the actual vertical size of the paragraph may not
% match the size the output routine had been told to expect, and
% you may get an overfull/underfull "\vbox" message from the output
% routine.  To minimize the risk of this, you can do two things:
% keep the "plus" and "minus" components of "\interparanoteglue"
% small compared with its natural glue, and keep them the same as
% each other.  As a general precaution, keep the size and
% flexibility of the "\skip\footins" glue on the high side too:
% because the reckoning is approximate, footnote blocks may be up
% to a line bigger or smaller than the output routine allows for,
% so keep some flexible space between the text and the notes.
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\parafootfmt}
% "\parafootfmt" is
% "\normalfootfmt" adapted to do the special stuff
% needed for paragraphed notes---leaving out the "\endgraf" at the
% end, sticking in special penalties and kern, and leaving out the
% "\footstrut".  The first argument is the line and page
% number information, the second is the lemma, and the third is the
% text of the footnote.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\parafootfmt#1#2#3{%
  \normal@pars
  \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus1fil
  {\notenumfont\printlines#1|}\enspace
  {\select@lemmafont#1|#2}\rbracket\enskip
  #3\penalty-10 }
%    \end{macrocode}
% Note that in the above definition, the penalty of $-10$
% encourages a line break between notes, so that notes have a
% slight tendency to begin on new lines.
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\para@footgroup}
% This "footgroup" code is modelled on the macros in {\em The
% \TeX book}, p.\,399.  The only difference is the "\unpenalty"
% in "\makehboxofhboxes", which is there to remove the penalty of
% $0$ which was added to the end of each footnote by
% "\para@vfootnote".
%
% The call to "\notefontsetup" is to ensure that the correct
% "\baselineskip" for the footnotes is used. The argument is the
% note series letter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\para@footgroup#1{%
  \unvbox\csname #1footins\endcsname \makehboxofhboxes
  \setbox0=\hbox{\unhbox0 \removehboxes}%
  \notefontsetup
  \noindent\unhbox0\par}
\def\makehboxofhboxes{\setbox0=\hbox{}%
  \loop
    \unpenalty
    \setbox2=\lastbox
  \ifhbox2
    \setbox0=\hbox{\box2\unhbox0}
  \repeat}
\def\removehboxes{\setbox0=\lastbox
  \ifhbox0{\removehboxes}\unhbox0 \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Columnar footnotes}
%
% \begin{macro}{\rigidbalance}
% \begin{macro}{\dosplits}
% \begin{macro}{\splitoff}
% \begin{macro}{\@h}
% \begin{macro}{\@k}
% We will now define macros for three-column notes and two-column
% notes. Both sets of macros will use "\rigidbalance", which splits a
% box ("#1") into into a number ("#2") of columns, each
% with a space ("#3") between the top baseline and the top of
% the "\vbox".  The "\rigidbalance" macro is taken from
% {\em The \TeX book}, p.\,397, with a slight change to the syntax of
% the arguments so that they don't depend on white space.  Note also
% the extra unboxing in "\splitoff", which allows the new "\vbox" to
% have its natural height as it goes into the alignment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\@k \newdimen\@h
\def\rigidbalance#1#2#3{\setbox0=\box#1 \@k=#2 \@h=#3
  \line{\splittopskip=\@h \vbadness=\@M \hfilneg
  \valign{##\vfil\cr\dosplits}}}
\def\dosplits{\ifnum\@k>0 \noalign{\hfil}\splitoff
  \global\advance\@k-1\cr\dosplits\fi}
\def\splitoff{\dimen0=\ht0
  \divide\dimen0 by\@k \advance\dimen0 by\@h
  \setbox2 \vsplit0 to \dimen0
  \unvbox2 }
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \paragraph{Three columns}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footthreecol}
% You say "\footthreecol{A}" to have the "A" series of footnotes
% typeset in three columns. It is important to call this only after
% "\hsize" has been set for the document.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\footthreecol#1{%
  \expandafter\let\csname v#1footnote\endcsname=\threecolvfootnote
  \expandafter\let\csname #1footfmt\endcsname=\threecolfootfmt
  \expandafter\let\csname #1footgroup\endcsname=\threecolfootgroup
  \threecolfootsetup{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The "\footstart" and "\footnoterule" macros for these notes assume
% the normal values (p.\,\pageref{normalvalues} above).
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\threecolfootsetup}
% The "\threecolfootsetup" macro calculates and sets some numbers
% for three-column footnotes.
%
% We set the "\count" of the foot insert to $333$.
% Each footnote can be thought of as contributing only one third of
% its height to the page, since the footnote insertion has been
% made as a long narrow column, which then gets trisected by the
% "\rigidbalance" routine (inside "\threecolfootgroup").
% These new, shorter columns are saved in a box, and then that box
% is {\em put back\/} into the footnote insert, replacing the
% original collection of footnotes.  This new box is, therefore,
% only about a third of the height of the original one.
%
% The "\dimen" value for this note series has to change in the
% inverse way: it needs to be three times
% the actual limit on the amount of space these notes are allowed to
% fill on the page, because when \TeX\ is
% accumulating material for the page
% and checking that limit, it doesn't apply the "\count" scaling.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\threecolfootsetup#1{%
  \count\csname #1footins\endcsname 333
  \multiply\dimen\csname #1footins\endcsname by 3 }
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\threecolvfootnote}
% "\threecolvfootnote"
% is the "\vfootnote" command for three-column notes. The
% call to "\notefontsetup" ensures that the
% "\splittopskip" and "\splitmaxdepth" take their values
% from the right "\strutbox": the one used in footnotes.
% Note especially the importance of temporarily reducing the
% "\hsize" to $0.3$ of its normal value.  This determines the
% widths of the individual columns.  So if the normal "\hsize"
% is, say, 10\,cm, then each column will be $0.3\times10=3$\,cm
% wide, leaving a gap of 1\,cm spread equally between columns
% (i.e., .5\,cm between each).
%
% The arguments are 1)~the note series letter and 2)~the full text
% of the note (including numbers, lemma and text).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\threecolvfootnote#1#2{%
  \insert\csname #1footins\endcsname\bgroup
  \notefontsetup
  \interlinepenalty=\csname inter#1footnotelinepenalty\endcsname
  \floatingpenalty=20000
  \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox \splitmaxdepth=\dp\strutbox
  \rightskip=0pt \leftskip=0pt
  \csname #1footfmt\endcsname #2\egroup}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\threecolfootfmt}
% "\threecolfootfmt"
% is the command that formats one note.
% It uses "\raggedright", which will usually be
% preferable with such short lines.  Setting the "\parindent"
% to zero means that, within each individual note, the lines begin
% flush left.
%
% The arguments are 1)~the line numbers, 2)~the lemma and 3)~the
% text of the "-footnote" command.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\threecolfootfmt#1#2#3{%
  \normal@pars
  \hsize .3\hsize
  \parindent=0pt
  \tolerance=5000
  \raggedright
  \leavevmode
  \strut{\notenumfont\printlines#1|}\enspace
  {\select@lemmafont#1|#2}\rbracket\enskip
  #3\strut\par\allowbreak}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\threecolfootgroup}
% And here is the "footgroup" macro that's called within the
% output routine to regroup the notes into three columns. Once
% again, the call to "\notefontsetup" is there to ensure that
% it is the right "\splittopskip"---the one used in
% footnotes---which is used to provide the third argument for
% "\rigidbalance".  This third argument ("\@h") is the
% "topskip" for the box containing the text of the
% footnotes, and does the job of making sure the top lines of the
% columns line up horizontally.  In {\em The \TeX book}, p.\,398,
% Donald Knuth suggests retrieving the ouput of "\rigidbalance",
% putting it back into the insertion box, and then printing the
% box.  Here, we just print the "\line" which comes out of
% "\rigidbalance" directly, without any re-boxing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\threecolfootgroup#1{{\notefontsetup
  \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox
  \expandafter
  \rigidbalance\csname #1footins\endcsname 3 \splittopskip }}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \paragraph{Two columns}
%
% \begin{macro}{\foottwocol}
% You say "\foottwocol{A}" to have the "A" series of footnotes
% typeset in two columns. It is important to call this only after
% "\hsize" has been set for the document.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\foottwocol#1{%
  \expandafter\let\csname v#1footnote\endcsname=\twocolvfootnote
  \expandafter\let\csname #1footfmt\endcsname=\twocolfootfmt
  \expandafter\let\csname #1footgroup\endcsname=\twocolfootgroup
  \twocolfootsetup{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\twocolfootsetup}
% \begin{macro}{\twocolvfootnote}
% \begin{macro}{\twocolfootfmt}
% \begin{macro}{\twocolfootgroup}
% Here is a series of macros which are very similar to their
% three-column counterparts. In this case,
% each note is assumed to contribute only a half a line of text.
% And the notes are set in columns
% "0.45\hsize" wide, giving a gap between them of one tenth
% of the "\hsize".
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\twocolfootsetup#1{%
  \count\csname #1footins\endcsname 500
  \multiply\dimen\csname #1footins\endcsname by 2 }
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\twocolvfootnote#1#2{\insert\csname #1footins\endcsname\bgroup
  \notefontsetup
  \interlinepenalty=\csname inter#1footnotelinepenalty\endcsname
  \floatingpenalty=20000
  \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox \splitmaxdepth=\dp\strutbox
  \rightskip=0pt \leftskip=0pt
  \csname #1footfmt\endcsname #2\egroup}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\twocolfootfmt#1#2#3{%
  \normal@pars
  \hsize .45\hsize
  \parindent=0pt
  \tolerance=5000
  \raggedright
  \leavevmode
  \strut{\notenumfont\printlines#1|}\enspace
  {\select@lemmafont#1|#2}\rbracket\enskip
  #3\strut\par\allowbreak}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\twocolfootgroup#1{{\notefontsetup
  \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox
  \expandafter
  \rigidbalance\csname #1footins\endcsname 2 \splittopskip}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Output routine}
% \label{output}\relax
%
% Now we begin the output routine and associated things.
%
% \subsection{Crop marks}
%
% The following are the parameters that specify the page dimensions
% that relate to crop marks; they are set by the "\cropsetup"
% macro.
%
% \begin{macro}{\crop@vsize}
% "\crop@vsize" is the vertical distance between crop marks.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\crop@vsize \crop@vsize=0pt
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\crop@hsize}
% "\crop@hsize" is the horizontal distance between crop marks.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\crop@hsize \crop@hsize=0pt
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\head@margin}
% "\head@margin" is the head margin.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\head@margin \head@margin=0pt
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\back@margin}
% "\back@margin" is the back margin.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\back@margin \back@margin=0pt
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\odd@back}
% \begin{macro}{\even@back}
% \begin{macro}{\@back}
% To handle the odd/even difference in the back margin, we keep the
% different margin sizes in two registers, "\odd@back" and
% "\even@back", and use a token register, "\@back", to
% hold the code that decides which to use.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\odd@back \odd@back=0pt
\newdimen\even@back \even@back=0pt
\newtoks\@back
\@back={\ifodd\pageno \odd@back \else \even@back\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\registration@marks}
% We store up the registration marks in a box
% called "\registration@marks" that's reused for every
% page, instead of regenerating them all again at each page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newbox\registration@marks
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\vertical@rules}
% \begin{macro}{\horizontal@rules}
% The following are macros that will be used in
% the course of making "\registration@marks".
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\vertical@rules{%
  \hbox to\crop@hsize{%
    \vrule height1pc width\cropwidth depth0pt
    \hfil
    \vrule width\cropwidth depth0pt}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\horizontal@rules{%
  \hbox to\crop@hsize{%
    \llap{\vrule width1pc height\cropwidth \kern\cropgap}%
    \hfil
    \rlap{\kern\cropgap \vrule width1pc height\cropwidth}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cropwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\cropgap}
% Set standard values for the thickness of the rules used for drawing crop
% marks ("\cropwidth") and the gap by which crop marks don't cross
% ("\cropgap").
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\cropwidth \cropwidth=.4pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\cropgap \cropgap=5pt
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\magicvskip}
% \begin{macro}{\headlinefont}
% \label{magic}\relax
% Publishers usually measure the head margin for the crop marks
% from the top of the running head.\footnote{Cf.\ Hugh Williamson,
% {\it Methods of Book Design\/} (New Haven: Yale University Press,
% 1983), p.\,21.\protect\index{Williamson, Hugh}}
%
% \PlainTeX's starting reference point for a page is not the
% running head, but a point "\topskip" above the baseline of
% the first line of main text on the page.  (Before doing anything
% else, \TeX\ adds a small amount of skip to the top of a new page,
% which is calculated to bring the baseline of the top line of text
% down to "\topskip" from the top of the page, i.e., from the
% point where the "\vsize" is measured from: {\em The \TeX
% book}, pp.\,113--114.) So any vertical matter we add in the output
% routine to the start of a page will sit with its base at a point
% "\topskip" above the baseline of the first line of the main
% text.  And if "\ht\strutbox" is the height of the header box
% we are adding, then the distance between its top and the
% reference point will be
% "\topskip"$-$"\ht\strutbox"$-s$, where $s$ is the space
% we want to put between the baselines of the header and the first
% text line.
%
% In \PlainTeX, this distance is $-22.5$\,pt, a ``magic constant''
% explained in {\em The \TeX book}, p.\,255. Rather than using this
% figure explicitly, "EDMAC" calculates it afresh, in case
% you have changed any of the values that go to make up this magic
% constant. The parameters involved are the "\topskip", the
% font of the "\headline" text (which determines the height of
% the "\strutbox"), and the "\baselineskip" (assuming that you
% want the header to be exactly two lines above the first line of
% the text). This calculation is done within "\cropsetup".
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\magicvskip \magicvskip=\topskip
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% If the "\headline" is going to be set at a different height
% from the top of the text, or in a different size of font,
% be sure to make the appropriate changes to the
% above parameters, or the crop marks will not be in the right
% position. We now set the standard value for "\headlinefont".
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\headlinefont=\rm
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cropsetup}
% \begin{macro}{\ifcropmarks@}
% Here at last is the "\cropsetup"
% macro that takes the page and margin
% dimensions you specify and calculates all the other parameters
% from them. It should always be used after "\hsize",
% "\makeheadline", and "\headlinefont" for the
% document have been set, as explained above.
% These macros use the same approach as those published by David
% Salomon\index{Salomon, David} in {\em TUGboat\/} {\bf 11} (1990),
% pp.\,77--78.  Cf.\ also the "\setcornerrules" code in {\em The \TeX
% book}, pp.\,416--417.
%
% The four arguments are as described above, on page
% \pageref{cropsetup}.
%
% First, set up a conditional, "\ifcropmarks@",
% for use in the output routine.
% Initially, it's false.  (It is set to true when you use the
% "\cropsetup" macro.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifcropmarks@
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now the main macro to set up crop marks:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\cropsetup#1#2#3#4{\cropmarks@true
  \global\crop@vsize=#1
  \global\crop@hsize=#2
  \global\head@margin=#3
  \global\back@margin=#4
%    \end{macrocode}
% The back margin for odd pages is easy. For even pages, we take the
% full width and subtract the text width and back margin size.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \global\odd@back=\back@margin
  \global\even@back=\crop@hsize
  \global\advance\even@back by -\hsize
  \global\advance\even@back by -\back@margin
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \setbox\registration@marks=
    \vbox to \crop@vsize{%
      \offinterlineskip
      \vbox to0pt{\vss
        \vertical@rules
        \kern\cropgap
        \horizontal@rules}%
      \vfil
      \vbox to0pt{%
        \horizontal@rules
        \kern\cropgap
        \vertical@rules\vss}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Set the box's size to zero.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ht\registration@marks=0pt
  \wd\registration@marks=0pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% In the next lines, we set the font to "\headlinefont" so that
% the height of the "\strutbox" will be the that of the
% "\headlinefont" font. This makes the assumption that font
% used for the "\headline" is invoked by "\headlinefont",
% and that the "\headlinefont" macro defines a
% "\strutbox" of an appropriate size for the font.  (The
% standard setting is to \PlainTeX's "\rm", and the height of a
% "\strutbox" for this font is already set by \PlainTeX.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \global\magicvskip=\topskip
  {\headlinefont \global\advance\magicvskip by -\ht\strutbox}%
  \global\advance\magicvskip by -2\baselineskip}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Output routine}
%
% \begin{macro}{\output}
% \begin{macro}{\edmac@output}
% \begin{macro}{\pagecontents}
% This is a new output routine, with changes to handle printing all our
% footnotes. Those changes have not been added directly, but are in macros
% that get called here: that should make it easier to see what would need
% to be taken over to a different output routine. We continue to use the
% "\pagebody", "\makeheadline", "\makefootline", and "\dosupereject"
% macros of \PlainTeX; for those macros, and the original version of
% "\output", see {\em The \TeX book}, p.\,364.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\output{\edmac@output}
\def\edmac@output{\shipout\vbox{\normal@pars
  \ifcropmarks@
    \do@cropmarks
  \else
    \vbox{\makeheadline\pagebody\makefootline}%
  \fi}%
  \advancepageno
  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-\@MM\else\dosupereject\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pagecontents{\page@start
  \ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
  \dimen@=\dp\@cclv \unvbox\@cclv % open up \box255
  \do@feet
  \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\do@cropmarks}
% When crop marks are to be printed,
% "\edmac@output" uses this macro to print them, along with the
% text of the page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\do@cropmarks{%
  \vbox{\offinterlineskip
    \kern\magicvskip
    \copy\registration@marks
    \kern-\magicvskip}%
  \nointerlineskip
  \kern\head@margin
  \moveright\the\@back\vbox{\makeheadline\pagebody\makefootline}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\do@feet}
% "\do@feet" ships out all the footnotes. Standard "EDMAC" has only
% five feet, but there is nothing in principal to prevent you
% from creating an arachnoid or centipedal edition; straightforward
% modifications of "EDMAC" are all that's required. However, the
% myria\-pedal edition is ruled out by \TeX's limitations: the number
% of insertion classes is limited to $255$.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\do@feet{%
  \ifvoid\footins\else
    \vskip\skip\footins
    \footnoterule
    \unvbox\footins
  \fi
  \ifvoid\Afootins\else
    \Afootstart{A}\Afootgroup{A}%
  \fi
  \ifvoid\Bfootins\else
    \Bfootstart{B}\Bfootgroup{B}%
  \fi
  \ifvoid\Cfootins\else
    \Cfootstart{C}\Cfootgroup{C}%
  \fi
  \ifvoid\Dfootins\else
    \Dfootstart{D}\Dfootgroup{D}%
  \fi
  \ifvoid\Efootins\else
    \Efootstart{E}\Efootgroup{E}%
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Cross referencing}
% \label{xref}\relax
%
% You can mark a place in the text using a command of the form
% "\label{foo}", and later refer to it using the label
% "foo" by saying "\pageref{foo}", or "\lineref{foo}" or
% "\sublineref{foo}". These reference commands will produce,
% respectively, the page, line and sub-line on which the
% "\label{foo}" command occurred.
%
% The reference macros warn you if a reference is made to an
% undefined label. If "foo" has been used as a label before,
% the "\label{foo}" command will issue a complaint; subsequent
% "\pageref" and "\lineref" commands will refer to the
% latest occurrence of "\label{foo}". When any of these
% commands are used, an additional auxiliary file, called
% \meta{filename}".aux", is created.
%
% \begin{macro}{\labelref@list}
% Set up a new list, "\labelref@list", to hold the page, line and
% sub-line numbers for each label.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\list@create{\labelref@list}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@aux}
% "\@aux" is the output stream number for our auxiliary file
% that contains labeling commands.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newwrite\@aux
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\do@labelsfile}
% The "\do@labelsfile" macro
% opens the auxiliary labels file and executes it; the file should
% consist of a stream of "\make@labels" commands. Then it opens
% a new auxiliary file, and redefines itself so that it isn't called
% again. This will be called by the first "\label" or reference
% command that appears in the text---and not at all if there are no
% labels or references, so we won't bother at all with an ".aux"
% file if there's no need for it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\do@labelsfile{%
   \openin\@inputcheck=\jobname.aux
   \ifeof\@inputcheck \else
      \closein\@inputcheck
      \begingroup
         \makeatletter \catcode`\^^M=9
         \input\jobname.aux
      \endgroup
   \fi
   \immediate\openout\@aux=\jobname.aux
   \global\let\do@labelsfile=\relax}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\label}
% \begin{macro}{\zz@@@}
% The "\label" command first writes a "\@lab" macro to
% the "\linenum@out" file.  It then checks to see that the
% "\labelref@list" actually has something in it (if not, it
% creates a dummy entry), and pops the next value for the current
% label, storing it in "\label@refs". Finally it defines the
% label to be "\empty" so that any future check will turn up
% the fact that it has been used.\footnote{The remaining macros
% in this section were kindly revised by Wayne
% Sullivan,\index{Sullivan, Wayne}  who
% substantially improved their efficiency and flexibility.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\zz@@@{000|000|000} % set three counters to zero in one go
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\label#1{\do@labelsfile
  \write\linenum@out{\string\@lab}%
  \ifx\labelref@list\empty
    \xdef\label@refs{\zz@@@}%
  \else
    \gl@p\labelref@list\to\label@refs
  \fi
  \edef\next{\write\@aux{\string\make@labels\label@refs|{#1}}}%
  \next}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\make@labels}
% The "\make@labels" macro gets executed when the labels file is
% read. For each label it defines a macro, whose name is made up
% partly from the label you supplied, that contains the page, line
% and sub-line numbers.  But first it checks to see whether the
% label has already been used (and complains if it has).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\make@labels#1|#2|#3|#4{%
  \expandafter\ifx\csname the@label#4\endcsname \relax\else
    \edmac@warning{Duplicate definition of label `#4'
                   on page \number\pageno.}%
  \fi
  \expandafter\gdef\csname the@label#4\endcsname{#1|#2|#3}%
  \ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@lab}
% The "\@lab" command, which appears in the "\linenum@out" file,
% appends the current values of page, line and sub-line to the
% "\labelref@list". These values are defined by the earlier
% "\@page", "\@l", and the "\sub@on" and "\sub@off" commands
% appearing in the "\linenum@out" file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@lab{\xright@appenditem
  {\the\page@num|\the\line@num|%
     \ifsublines@ \the\subline@num \else 0\fi}\to\labelref@list}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pageref}
% \begin{macro}{\xpageref}
% If the specified label exists, "\pageref" gives its page number.
% For this reference command, as for the other two, a special
% version with prefix "x" is provided for use in places where the
% command is to be scanned as a number, as in "\linenum". These
% special versions have two limitations: they don't print error
% messages if the reference is unknown, and they can't appear as
% the first label or reference command in the file; you must ensure
% that a "\label" or a normal reference command appears first, or
% these x-commands will always return zeros.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pageref#1{\ref@undefined{#1}\getref@num{1}{#1}}
\def\xpageref#1{\getref@num{1}{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\lineref}
% \begin{macro}{\xlineref}
% If the specified label exists, "\lineref" gives its line number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\lineref#1{\ref@undefined{#1}\getref@num{2}{#1}}
\def\xlineref#1{\getref@num{2}{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sublineref}
% \begin{macro}{\xsublineref}
% If the specified label exists, "\sublineref" gives its sub-line number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\sublineref#1{\ref@undefined{#1}\getref@num{3}{#1}}
\def\xsublineref#1{\getref@num{3}{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ref@undefined}
% The next three macros are used by the referencing commands above,
% and do the job of extracting the right numbers from the label
% macro that contains the page, line, and sub-line number. The
% "\ref@undefined" macro is called when you refer to a label with
% the normal referencing macros.  Its argument is a label, and it
% just checks that the labels file has indeed been opened and read (if
% not, it does so), and that the label is defined (if not, it
% squeals).  (It is these checks which the "x-" forms of the
% reference macros leave out.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\ref@undefined#1{\do@labelsfile
  \expandafter\ifx\csname the@label#1\endcsname\relax
  \edmac@warning{Reference `#1'
           on page \the\pageno\space undefined. Using `000'.}%
        \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\getref@num}
% Next, "\getref@num" fetches the number we want.  It has two
% arguments: the first is simply a digit, specifying whether to
% fetch a page ("1"), line ("2") or sub-line ("3") number.  (This
% switching is done by calling "\label@parse".) The second argument
% is the label-macro, which because of the "\@lab" macro above is
% defined to be a string of the type "123|456|789".
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\getref@num#1#2{%
  \expandafter
  \ifx\csname the@label#2\endcsname \relax
    000%
  \else
    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
    \label@parse\csname the@label#2\endcsname|#1%
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\label@parse}
% Notice that we slipped another "|" delimiter into the
% penultimate line of "\getref@num", to
% keep the ``switch-number'' separate from the reference numbers.  This
% "|" is used as another parameter delimiter by "\label@parse",
% which extracts the appropriate number from its first arguments.
% The "|"-delimited arguments consist of the expanded label-macro
% (three reference numbers), followed by the switch-number ( "1",
% "2", or "3") which defines which of the earlier three numbers to
% pick out. (It was earlier given as the first argument of
% "\getref@num".)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\label@parse#1|#2|#3|#4{%
  \ifcase #4\relax
  \or #1%
  \or #2%
  \or #3%
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\xxref}
% The "\xxref" command takes two arguments, both of which are
% labels, e.g., "\xxref{mouse}{elephant}".  It first does some
% checking to make sure that the labels do exist (if one doesn't,
% those numbers are set to zero).  Then it calls "\linenum" and sets
% the beginning page, line, and sub-line numbers to those of the
% place where "\label{mouse}" was placed, and the ending
% numbers to those at "\label{elephant}".  The point of this is
% to be able to manufacture footnote line references to passages
% which can't be specified in the normal way as the first argument
% to "\text" for one reason or another.  Using "\xxref" in the
% second argument of "\text" lets you set things up at least
% semi-automatically.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\xxref#1#2{%
  {\expandafter\ifx\csname the@label#1\endcsname
   \relax \expandafter\let\csname the@label#1\endcsname\zz@@@\fi
   \expandafter\ifx\csname the@label#2\endcsname \relax
   \expandafter\let\csname the@label#2\endcsname\zz@@@\fi
   \linenum{\csname the@label#1\endcsname|%
    \csname the@label#2\endcsname}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makelabel}
% Sometimes the "\label" command cannot be used to specify
% exactly the page and line desired; you can use the "\makelabel" macro
% make your own label.  For example, if you say
% ``"\makelabel{elephant}{10|25|0}"'' you will have created a
% new label, and a later call to "\pageref{elephant}" would
% print ``10'' and "\lineref{elephant}" would print ``25''.
% The sub-line number here is zero.
% "\makelabel" takes a label, followed by a page and a line number(s)
% as arguments.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\makelabel#1#2{\expandafter\xdef\csname the@label#1\endcsname{#2}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% (If you are only going to refer to such a label using
% "\xxref", then you can omit entries in the same way as with
% "\linenum" (see pp.\,\pageref{linenumdef} and
% \pageref{linenumbers}), since "\xxref" makes a call to
% "\linenum" in order to do its work.)
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \section{Endnotes}
% \label{endnotes}\relax
%
% \begin{macro}{\@end}
% \begin{macro}{\ifend@}
% \begin{macro}{\end@true}
% \begin{macro}{\end@false}
% Endnotes of all varieties are saved up in a file, typically named
% \meta{filename}".end".
% "\@end" is the output stream number for
% this file, and "\ifend@" is a flag that's "true" when the file is open.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newwrite\@end
\newif\ifend@
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\end@open}
% \begin{macro}{\end@close}
% "\end@open" and "\end@close" are the
% macros that are used to open and close the endnote file. Note that
% all our writing to this file is "\immediate": all page and
% line numbers for the endnotes are generated by the same mechanism
% we use for the footnotes, so that there's no need to defer any
% writing to catch information from the output routine.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\end@open#1{\end@true\immediate\openout\@end=#1\relax}
\def\end@close{\end@false\immediate\closeout\@end}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\end@stuff}
% "\end@stuff" is used by "\beginnumbering" to
% do everything that's necessary for the endnotes at the
% start of each section: it opens the "\@end" file, if necessary,
% and writes the section number to the endnote file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\end@stuff{%
 \ifend@\relax\else
   \end@open{\jobname.end}%
 \fi
 \immediate\write\@end{\string\@section{\the\section@num}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Aendnote}
% \begin{macro}{\Bendnote}
% \begin{macro}{\Cendnote}
% \begin{macro}{\Dendnote}
% \begin{macro}{\Eendnote}
% The following five macros each function to
% write one endnote to the ".end" file. Like the footnotes, these
% endnotes come in five series, "A" through "E". We change
% "\newlinechar" so that in the file every space becomes the
% start of a new line; this generally ensures that a long note doesn't
% exceed restrictions on the length of lines in files.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Aendnote#1{{\newlinechar='40
       \immediate\write\@end{\string\Aend%
                {\ifnumberedpar@\@nums\fi}%
                {\ifnumberedpar@\@tag\fi}{#1}}}\ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Bendnote#1{{\newlinechar='40
       \immediate\write\@end{\string\Bend%
                {\ifnumberedpar@\@nums\fi}%
                {\ifnumberedpar@\@tag\fi}{#1}}}\ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Cendnote#1{{\newlinechar='40
       \immediate\write\@end{\string\Cend%
                {\ifnumberedpar@\@nums\fi}%
                {\ifnumberedpar@\@tag\fi}{#1}}}\ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Dendnote#1{{\newlinechar='40
       \immediate\write\@end{\string\Dend%
                {\ifnumberedpar@\@nums\fi}%
                {\ifnumberedpar@\@tag\fi}{#1}}}\ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Eendnote#1{{\newlinechar='40
       \immediate\write\@end{\string\Eend%
                {\ifnumberedpar@\@nums\fi}%
                {\ifnumberedpar@\@tag\fi}{#1}}}\ignorespaces}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Aend}
% \begin{macro}{\Bend}
% \begin{macro}{\Cend}
% \begin{macro}{\Dend}
% \begin{macro}{\Eend}
% \begin{macro}{\endprint}
% \begin{macro}{\@gobblethree}
% \begin{macro}{\@section}
% "\Aendnote" and the like write commands called "\Aend" and
% so on to the endnote file; these are analogous to the various
% "footfmt" commands above, and they take the same arguments.
% When we process this file, we'll want to pick out the notes of one
% series and ignore all the rest. To do that, we equate the "end"
% command for the series we want to "\endprint", and leave the
% rest equated to "\@gobblethree", which just skips over its three
% arguments. The "\endprint" here is nearly identical in its
% functioning to "\normalfootfmt".
%
% The endnote file also contains "\@section" commands, which
% supply the section numbers from the main text; standard "EDMAC" does
% nothing with this information, but it's there if you want to write
% custom macros to do something with it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\endprint#1#2#3{{\notefontsetup{\notenumfont\printlines#1|}%
      \enspace{\select@lemmafont#1|#2}\enskip#3\par}}
\def\@gobblethree#1#2#3{}
\let\Aend=\@gobblethree
\let\Bend=\@gobblethree
\let\Cend=\@gobblethree
\let\Dend=\@gobblethree
\let\Eend=\@gobblethree
\let\@section=\@gobble
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\doendnotes}
% "\doendnotes" is
% the command you use to print one series of endnotes; it
% takes one argument, the series letter of the note series you want
% to print.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\doendnotes#1{\end@close
   \begingroup
      \makeatletter
      \expandafter\let\csname #1end\endcsname=\endprint
      \input\jobname.end
   \endgroup}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\noendnotes}
% You can say "\noendnotes" before the first
% "\beginnumbering" in your file if you aren't going to be using
% any of the endnote commands: this will suppress the creation of
% an ".end" file. If you do have some lingering endnote
% commands in your file,
% the notes will be written to your terminal and to the \TeX\ log file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\noendnotes{\global\let\end@stuff=\relax
                \global\chardef\@end=16 }
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{The End}\label{end}
%
% At signs are no longer letters.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\makeatother
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \newpage
% \appendix
%
% \section{Examples}\label{examples}
%
% In the following examples, the command "\input edmac.doc" has
% been included for completeness.  This is always safe, since
% "EDMAC" checks to see if has been loaded before.  But, as mentioned
% above, it is usually more convenient to include the "EDMAC" macros
% in a pre-digested \TeX\ format file, to be invoked with a command such
% as "tex &edmac" \meta{filename}.
%
% \subsection{General example of features}
% This made-up example, "features.tex", is included purely to illustrate
% some of "EDMAC"'s main features.  It is hard to find real-world
% examples that actually use as many layers of notes as this, so we made
% one up.  The example is a bit tricky to read, but close study and
% comparison with the output (Figure~\ref{features-out}) will be
% illuminating.
% \begin{figure}[p]
% \includegraphics{features}
% \vspace*{\textheight}                 ^^A supply artwork
% \vspace*{-3\baselineskip}
% \caption{Output from {\tt features.tex}.}
% \label{features-out}
% \end{figure}
%
% \medskip
% \hrule
% \medskip
% \begin{small}
% \begin{verbatim}
% \input edmac.doc
% \hsize 28pc
% \vsize 35pc
% \cropsetup{45pc}{35pc}{4pc}{4pc}
% \headline{Headline \hfil \folio}
% \footline{Footline \hfil --\folio--\hfil footline}
%
% \makeatletter
% % I'd like a spaced out colon after the lemma:
% \def\spacedcolon{{\rm\thinspace:\thinspace}}
% \def\normalfootfmt#1#2#3{%
%   \normal@pars
%   \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
%   {\notenumfont\printlines#1|}\strut\enspace
%   {\select@lemmafont#1|#2}\spacedcolon\enskip#3\strut\par}
%
% % And I'd like the 3-col notes printed with a hanging indent:
% \def\threecolfootfmt#1#2#3{%
%   \normal@pars
%   \hsize .3\hsize
%   \parindent=0pt
%   \tolerance=5000       % high, but not infinite
%   \raggedright
%   \hangindent1.5em \hangafter1
%   \leavevmode
%   \strut\hbox to 1.5em{\notenumfont\printlines#1|\hfil}\ignorespaces
%   {\select@lemmafont#1|#2}\rbracket\enskip
%   #3\strut\par\allowbreak}
%
% % And I'd like the 2-col notes printed with a double colon:
% \def\doublecolon{{\rm\thinspace::\thinspace}}
% \def\twocolfootfmt#1#2#3{%
%   \normal@pars
%   \hsize .45\hsize
%   \parindent=0pt
%   \tolerance=5000
%   \raggedright
%   \leavevmode
%   \strut{\notenumfont\printlines#1|}\enspace
%   {\select@lemmafont#1|#2}\doublecolon\enskip
%   #3\strut\par\allowbreak}
%
% % And in the paragraphed footnotes, I'd like a colon too:
% \def\parafootfmt#1#2#3{%
%   \normal@pars
%   \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
%   {\notenumfont\printlines#1|}\enspace
%   {\select@lemmafont#1|#2}\spacedcolon\enskip
%   #3\penalty-10 }
% \makeatother
%
% % I'd like the line numbers picked out in bold.
% \let\notenumfont=\eightbf
% \lineation{page}
% \linenummargin{inner}
% \firstlinenum=3       % just because I can
% \linenumincrement=1
% \foottwocol{A}
% \footthreecol{B}
% \footparagraph{E}
% % I've changed \normalfootfmt, so invoke it again for C and D notes.
% \footnormal{C}
% \footnormal{D}
%
% \beginnumbering
%
% \pstart
% This is an \text{example}
%   \Afootnote{eximemple C, D.}/
% of some text with \text{variant}
%   \Afootnote{alternative, A, B.}/
% readings recorded as `A' footnotes.  From here on, \text{though}
%   \Afootnote{however $\alpha$, $\beta$}/,
% we shall have \text{`C'}
%   \Bfootnote{B, {\it pace\/} the text}/.
% \text{For spice, let us mark a longer passage, but give a different
%   lemma for it, so that we don't get a \text{huge}
%     \Dfootnote{vast E, F; note that this is
%     a `D' note to section of text within a longer lemma}/
%   amount of text in a note}\lemma{For spice \dots\ note}
%   \Cfootnote{The note here is type `C'}/.
% \text{Finally}
%   \Efootnote{in the end X, Y}/,
% \text{we}
%   \Efootnote{us K}/
% \text{shouldn't}
%   \Efootnote{ought not to L, M}/
% \text{forget the}
%   \Efootnote{omit to mention the \S, \P}/
% \text{paragraphed}
%   \Efootnote{blocked M, N}/
% \text{notes}
%   \Efootnote{variants HH, KK}/,
% which are so \text{useful}
%   \Efootnote{truly useful L, P}/
% when there are \text{a great number of}
%   \Efootnote{many, many (preferably)}/
% short notes to be \text{recorded}
%   \Efootnote{noted: repetition}/.
% \pend
%
% \pstart
% This is a second paragraph, giving more {\it \text{examples}
%   \Afootnote{eximples L, M.}/}
% of text with \text{variant}
%   \Afootnote{alternative, A, B.}/
% readings recorded as `A' footnotes.  From here on, \text{though}
%   \Bfootnote{however $\alpha$, $\beta$}/,
% we shall have \text{`B'}
%   \Bfootnote{B, as correctly stated in the text}/ notes in the text.
% \text{For spice, let us mark a longer passage, but give a different
%   lemma for it, so that we don't get a {\it \text{huge}
%     \Dfootnote{vast E, F; note that this is
%     a `D' note to text within a longer lemma.}/}
%   amount of text in a note}\lemma{For spice, \dots\ note}
%   \Cfootnote{This is a rogue note of type `C'.}/.
% \text{Finally}
%   \Bfootnote{In the end X, Y}/,
% \text{we}
%   \Bfootnote{we here K}/
% \text{shouldn't}
%   \Bfootnote{ought not to L, M}/
% \text{forget the}
%   \Bfootnote{omit to mention the \S, \P}/
% \text{column}
%   \Bfootnote{blocked M, N}/
% \text{notes}
%   \Bfootnote{variants H}/,
% which are so \text{useful}
%   \Bfootnote{very, very useful L, P}/
% when there are \text{many}
%   \Bfootnote{lots of Z}/
% short notes to be \text{recorded}
%   \Bfootnote{recorded and put down: M (repetition)}/.
% \pend
%
% \endnumbering
% \bye
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{small}
% \medskip
% \hrule
% \medskip
%
% \subsection{Gascoigne}
% The first real-life example is taken from an edition of George
% Gascoigne's\index{Gascoigne, George}
% {\em A Hundreth Sundrie Flowres\/} that is being
% prepared by G.~W.~Pigman III,\index{Pigman, III$^{rd}$, G. W.} at
% the California Institute of Technology. Figure \ref{iocasta-out}
% shows the result of setting the text with "EDMAC".
% \begin{figure}[p]
% \includegraphics{iocasta}
% \vspace*{\textheight}                       ^^A supply artwork
% \vspace*{-3\baselineskip}
% \caption{Output from {\tt iocasta.tex}.}
% \label{iocasta-out}
% \end{figure}
%
% The main input file first calls for a file of initial
% definitions, called "gg.tex".  This file, shown below,
% demonstrates how "EDMAC" macros may be customized to give
% detailed control over the final format.
% \medskip
%
% \hrule
% \medskip
% \begin{small}
% \begin{verbatim}
% % parameters for edition of Gascoigne's
% %    {\it A Hundreth Sundrie Flowres}.
% \ifx\ggloaded\relax\endinput\else\let\ggloaded=\relax\fi
% \noendnotes
% \makeatletter
% %
% \font\poemnumfont=cmmi12 \font\titlefont=cmr12 \font\ninerm=cmr9
% \font\nineit=cmti9       \font\eightrm=cmr8
% \let\headfont=\eightrm
% \font\eightit=cmti8      \let\headit=\eightit  \font\sixrm=cmr6
% \font\foliofont=cmmi8    \let\os=\foliofont
% \let\numlabfont=\foliofont
% %
% \firstsublinenum=1000
% \hoffset=1.25in \voffset=1.25in \hsize=24pc \vsize=488pt
% %
% \frenchspacing \parskip=0pt \hyphenpenalty=1000
% %
% \def\makeheadline{\vbox to 0pt{\vskip-16.5pt
%   \line{\vbox to8.5pt{}\the\headline}\vss}\nointerlineskip}
% \nopagenumbers
% %
% % Say \nolinenums if you want no line numbers in the notes.
% \newif\ifnolinenums
% \def\nolinenums{\global\nolinenumstrue}
% \def\linenums{\global\nolinenumsfalse}
% % Say \nopoemnum to suppress poem number in the notes.
% \newif\ifpoemnum
% \def\nopoemnum{\global\poemnumfalse}
% % Say \nodbpoemnum to suppress poem number in the notes for
% %  poems with two numbers, e.g., 64 (v).
% \newif\ifdbpoemnum
% \def\nodbpoemnum{\global\dbpoemnumfalse}
% % Say \noactnum to suppress act/scene numbers in the notes.
% \newif\ifactnum
% \def\noactnum{\global\actnumfalse}
% %
% \newcount\poemnumber
% \def\poem#1{\poemnumber=#1\poemnumtrue\parindent=0pt
%   \centerline{{\poemnumfont#1}}\vskip12pt}
% %
% \newcount\dbpoemnumone  \newcount\dbpoemnumtwo
% \def\dbpoem#1#2{\dbpoemnumtrue\dbpoemnumone=#1\dbpoemnumtwo=#2
%   \parindent=0pt\par
%   \centerline{{\poemnumfont#1} {\titlefont
%    (\romannumeral#2)}}\nointerlineskip \vskip12pt}
% %
% \newcount\actnumber \newcount\scenenumber
% \def\act #1 #2 #3{\actnumtrue\actnumber=#1\scenenumber=#2
%   \parindent=0pt\vskip24pt plus12pt minus3pt\hrule height0pt\relax
%   \pstart\startsub\centerline{\rm#3}\pend\endsub
%   \mark{{\os#1\fullstop #2}}\nobreak \vskip 12pt plus3pt minus3pt}
% %
% \def\rightlinenum{\ifbypage@\ifnum\line@num<10\kern.5em\fi\else
% \ifnum\line@num<10\kern1em\else\ifnum\line@num<100
%   \kern.5em\fi\fi\fi\kern.5em\numlabfont\the\line@num
%   \ifnum\subline@num>0:\the\subline@num\fi}
% \def\leftlinenum{\numlabfont\the\line@num
%   \ifnum\subline@num>0:\the\subline@num\fi \kern.5em}
% \linenummargin{outer}
% \lineation{page}
% \def\ggfootfmt#1#2#3{%
%   \notefontsetup
%   \let\par=\endgraf
%   \rightskip=0pt \leftskip=0pt
%   \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
%   \ifnolinenums\relax\else
%     \begingroup \os \panums \printlines#1|\endgroup
%     \enskip
%   \fi
%   {\rm #2\def\@tempa{#2}\ifx\@tempa\empty
%     \else]\enskip\fi#3\penalty-10 }}
% %
% % \panums adds the poem number or act/scene number to a
% % line number display when necessary.
% %
% \def\panums{%
%     \ifpoemnum                  % a poem
%       \the\poemnumber:%
%       \global\poemnumfalse
%     \fi
%     \ifdbpoemnum                % a poem with two numbers
%       \the\dbpoemnumone\space
%           {\rm(\romannumeral\the\dbpoemnumtwo).}%
%       \global\dbpoemnumfalse
%     \fi
%     \ifactnum                   % a play (act/scene)
%       \the\actnumber:\the\scenenumber:%
%       \global\actnumfalse
%     \fi}
% %
% % Now reset the \Afootnote parameters and macros:
% \footparagraph{A}
% \let\Afootfmt=\ggfootfmt
% \dimen\Afootins=\vsize
% \skip\Afootins=3pt plus9pt
% \def\ggfootstart#1{\vskip\skip\Afootins}
% \let\Afootstart=\ggfootstart
% \def\title{\pstart\startsub\let\par=\endtitle}
% \def\endtitle{\pend\endsub}
% \def\verseskip{\vskip6pt plus6pt}
% \def\speaker#1{\pstart\parindent=1em\let\par=\pend
%   {\tenit{#1}}\hbox to 1ex{}\ignorespaces}
% \def\sen{\leavevmode\lower1ex\hbox{\tenrm''}}
% \def\senspeak#1{\pstart\obeylines\setbox0=\hbox{\tenrm''}%
%   \leavevmode
%   \lower1ex\copy0\kern-\wd0\hskip1em{\tenit{#1}}%
%   \hbox to1ex{}\ignorespaces}
% \def\speak#1{\pstart\obeylines\hskip1em{\tenit{#1}}%
%   \hbox to1ex{}\ignorespaces}
% \def\nospeaker{\parindent=0em\pstart\let\par=\pend}
% \def\nospeak{\pstart\obeylines}
% \def\stage#1{\pstart\startsub\parindent=0pt
%   \hangindent=3em\hangafter=0
%   {\tenit#1}\let\par=\endstage}
% \let\endstage=\endtitle
% \def\motto#1{\pstart\startsub\centerline{{\tenit#1}}\pend\endsub}
% \def\finis#1{\pstart\startsub\smallskip\centerline{{\tenit#1}}
%   \let\par=\endfinis}
% \let\endfinis=\endtitle
% \def\initials#1{\pstart\line{\hfil{\it #1}\quad}\let\par=\pend}
% \makeatother
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{small}
% \medskip
% \hrule
% \medskip
%
% With these definitions, the actual input file,
% "iocasta.tex", is relatively simple:
%
% \medskip
% \hrule
% \medskip
% \begin{small}
% \begin{verbatim}
% \input edmac.doc
% \input gg
% \parindent=0pt
% \pageno=73
% \mark{{\os2:1}}
% \headline={\ifnum\pageno>61\ifodd\pageno
%     \rlap{\foliofont\botmark}\hfil\headfont
%     IOCASTA\hfil\llap{\foliofont\folio}%
%   \else
%     \rlap{\foliofont\folio}\hfil\headfont
%     IOCASTA\hfil\llap{\foliofont\botmark}\fi
%   \else\hfil\fi}
%
% \beginnumbering
%
% \stage{Oedipus \text{entreth}\Afootnote{{\it intrat} MS}/.}
%
% \nospeak
% Or that with wrong the right and doubtlesse heire,
% Shoulde banisht be out of his princely seate.
% Yet thou O queene, so fyle thy sugred toung,
% And with suche counsell decke thy mothers tale,
% That peace may bothe the brothers heartes inflame,
% And rancour yelde, that erst possest the same.
% \pend
%
% \speak{Eteocl.} Mother, beholde, youre hestes for to obey,
% In person nowe am I resorted hither:
% In haste therefore, fayne woulde I knowe what cause
% With hastie speede, so moued hath your mynde
% To call me nowe so causelesse out of tyme,
% When common wealth moste craues my onely ayde:
% Fayne woulde I knowe, what queynt commoditie
% Persuades you thus to take a truce for tyme,
% And yelde the gates wide open to my foe,
% The gates that myght our stately state defende,
% And nowe are made the path of our decay.
% \pend
%
% \senspeak{Ioca.}Represse deare son, those raging stormes of wrath,
% \sen That so bedimme the eyes of thine intente,
% \text{\sen As when \text{the}\Afootnote{thie MS}/ tongue %
%   (a redy Instrument)
% \sen Would \text{fayne pronounce}\Afootnote{faynest tell MS}/ %
%   the meaning of \text{the minde}\Afootnote{thy minde MS}/,
% \sen \text{It}\lemma{It \dots\ worde.}\Afootnote{Thie %
%   swelling hart puft vp with wicked ire / Can scarce pronounce %
%   one inward louing thought. MS}/ cannot speake one honest %
%   seemely worde.}\lemma{As \dots\ worde.}\Afootnote{{\it not %
%   in\/} \os73}/
% \sen But when disdayne is shrunke, or sette asyde,
% \sen And mynde of man with leysure can discourse
% \sen What seemely woordes his tale may best beseeme,
% \sen And that the toung vnfoldes without affectes
% \sen Then may proceede an answere sage and graue,
% \sen And euery sentence sawst with sobernesse:
% Wherefore vnbende thyne angrie browes deare chylde,
% And caste thy rolling eyes none other waye,
% That here doost not \text{{\it Medusaes\/}}%
% \Afootnote{One of the furies. {\os75}m}/ face beholde,
% But him, euen him, thy blood and brother deare.
% And thou beholde, my {\it Polinices\/} eke,
% Thy brothers face, wherin when thou mayst see
% Thine owne image, remember therwithall,
% That what offence thou woldst to him were done,
% \pend
% \endnumbering
% \bye
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{small}
% \medskip
% \hrule
%
% \subsection{Shakespeare}
% The following text illustrates another input file of moderate
% complexity, with two layers of annotation in use. The example is
% taken from the Arden {\em Merchant of Venice}.\index{Shakespeare, William}
% First, the file "arden.sty" contains a set of font
% definitions and format specifications:
%
% \medskip
% \hrule
% \medskip
% \begin{small}
% \begin{verbatim}
% \makeatletter
%
% % Macros for the edition:
% \def\stage#1{\rlap{\hbox to \the\linenumsep{%
%                        \hfil\llap{[{\it#1\/}]}}}}
% \def\speaker#1{\pstart\hangindent2em\hangafter1
%   \leavevmode{\it#1}\enspace\ignorespaces}
% \def\\{\hfil\break}
% \def\exit#1{\hfill\stage{#1}}
%
% % EDMAC customizations:
% \noendnotes \vsize 40pc \hsize 23pc \parindent 0pt
% \linenumsep=.4in \rightskip\linenumsep
% \def\interparanoteglue{1em plus.5em minus.1em}
%
% \catcode`\<=\active
% \def\xtext#1#2>{\text{#1}{#2}/}
% \let<=\xtext
%
% \let\numlabfont=\eighti
% \let\sc=\fiverm
% \let\Afootnoterule=\relax \let\Bfootnoterule=\relax
% \footline={\hfil}
% \def\rightlinenum{\numlabfont\llap{\the\line@num}}
% \pageno=46
% \headline={\eightpoint{\teni\folio}\hfil
%                      THE MERCHANT OF VENICE\hfil [ACT II}
% \cropsetup{8in}{5in}{3.5pc}{3pc}
% \hoffset=.75in   \voffset=.9375in
% \frenchspacing
%
% % Footnote formats:
% % \nonumparafootfmt is a footnote format without line numbers.
% \def\nonumparafootfmt#1#2#3{%
%   \normal@pars
%   \rightskip=0pt
%   \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
%   \select@lemmafont#1|#2\rbracket\enskip
%   \it#3\penalty-10 }
% \def\newparafootfmt#1#2#3{%
%   \normal@pars
%   \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
%   {\notenumfont\printlines#1|}\fullstop\enspace
%   {\select@lemmafont#1|#2}\rbracket\enskip
%   \it#3\penalty-10 }
% \def\newtwocolfootfmt#1#2#3{%
%   \normal@pars
%   \hsize .48\hsize
%   \tolerance=5000
%   \rightskip=0pt \leftskip=0pt \parindent=5pt
%   \strut\notenumfont\printlines#1|\fullstop\enspace
%   \it#2\/\rbracket\penalty100\hskip .5em plus .5em
%   \rm#3\strut\goodbreak}
%
% % Footnote style selections etc. (done last):
% \footparagraph{A}
% \foottwocol{B}
% \let\Afootfmt=\newparafootfmt
% \let\Bfootfmt=\newtwocolfootfmt
% \let\collation=\Afootnote
% \let\note=\Bfootnote
% \lineation{section}
% \linenummargin{right}
% \makeatother
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{small}
% \begin{figure}[p]
% \includegraphics{arden}
% \vspace*{\textheight}                         ^^A supply artwork
% \vspace*{-3\baselineskip}
% \caption{Output of the Arden text.}
% \label{arden-out}
% \end{figure}
% \medskip
% \hrule
% \medskip
%
% The Arden text, using the above definitions, is input as follows
% (the output is shown in Figure \ref{arden-out}):
%
% \medskip
% \hrule
% \medskip
% \begin{small}
% \begin{verbatim}
% \input edmac.doc
% \input arden.sty
%
% % Initially, we don't want line numbers.
% \let\Afootfmt=\nonumparafootfmt
%
% \beginnumbering
% \pstart
% \centerline{[<{SCENE III}
%   \lemma{Scene III}
%   \collation{Capell; om. Q, F; {\rm Scene IV} Pope.}>.---%
%   <{\it Venice}
%   \collation{om. Q, F; Shylock's house Theobald; The same.
%   A Room in Shylock's House Capell.}>.]}
% \pend
% \bigskip
%
% \pstart
% \centerline{\it Enter\/ {\rm JESSICA} and\/
%   {\rm [<{LAUNCELOT}
%   \lemma{Launcelot}
%   \collation{Rowe; om. Q, F.}>]} the clown.} \pend \bigskip
%
% \let\Afootfmt=\newparafootfmt % we do want line numbers from now
%
%  \setline{0}%
%
% \speaker{Jes.}<{I am}
%   \collation{Q, F; {\rm I'm} Pope.}>
%                       sorry thou wilt leave my father so,\\
% Our house is hell, and thou (a merry devil)\\
% Didst rob it of some taste of tediousness,---\\
% But fare thee well, there is a ducat for thee,\\
% And Launcelot, <{soon}
%   \note{early.}>
%                        at supper shalt thou see\\
% Lorenzo, who is thy new master's guest,\\
% Give him this letter,---do it secretly,---\\
% And so farewell: I would not have my father\\
% See me <{in}
%   \collation{Q; om. F.}>
%              talk with thee.
% \pend
%
% \speaker{Laun.}
%   <{}\lemma{\it Laun.}\collation{Q2; Clowne. Q, F.}>%
% <{Adieu!}
%   \collation{{\rm Adiew}, Q, F.}>
% tears <{exhibit}
%   \note{Eccles paraphrased ``My tears serve to express what my
%   tongue should, if sorrow would permit it,'' but probably it is
%   Launce\-lot's blunder for prohibit (Halliwell) or inhibit
%   (Clarendon).}>
% my tongue, most beautiful <{pagan}
%   \note{This may have a scurrilous undertone: cf. {\it 2 H 4,}
%   \sc II. \rm ii. 168.}>%
% , most sweet <{Jew!}
%   \collation{{\rm Iewe}, Q, F. \quad {\rm do]} Q, F;
%              {\rm did} F2.}>%
% ---if a Christian <{do}
%   \note{Malone upheld the reading of Qq and F by comparing \sc
%   II. \rm vi. 23: ``When you shall please to play the thieves for
%   wives''; Launcelot seems fond of hinting at what is going to
%   happen (cf. \sc II. \rm v. 22--3). If F2's ``did'' is accepted,
%   {\it get\/} is used for beget, as in \sc III. \rm v. 9.}>
% not play the knave and get thee, I am much deceived; but <{adieu!}
%   \collation{{\rm adiew}, Q, F.}>
% these <{foolish drops do \text{something}
%   \collation{Q; {\rm somewhat} F.}/
% drown my manly spirit}
%   \lemma{foolish{\rm\dots}spirit}
%   \note{``tears do not become a man'' (\it AYL., \sc III. \rm
%   iv. 3); cf. also \it H 5, \sc IV. \rm vi. 28--32.}>%
% : <{adieu!}
%   \collation{{\rm adiew}. Q, F. \quad {\rm S. D.]} Q2, F; om. Q;
%   after l. 15 Capell.}>
% \exit{Exit.}
% \pend
%
% \speaker{Jes.}
% Farewell good Launcelot.\\
% Alack, what heinous sin is it in me\\
% To be ashamed to be my father's <{child!}
%   \collation{{\rm child}, Q, F; {\rm Child?} Rowe.}>
% \pend
% \endnumbering
% \bye
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{small}
% \medskip
% \hrule
%
% \subsection{Classical text edition}
% The next example, which was extracted from a longer file kindly
% supplied by Wayne Sullivan,\index{Sullivan, Wayne} University
% College, Dublin, Ireland, illustrates the use of "EDMAC" to
% produce a Latin text edition, the {\em Periphyseon}, with Greek
% passages.\footnote{The bibliographic details of the forthcoming book
% are: Iohannis Scotti Erivgenae, {\it Periphyseon} ({\it De
% Diuisione Naturae\/}) Liber Qvartvs [Scriptores Latini Hiberniae
% vol.\,xii], (Dublin: School of Celtic Studies, Dublin Institute
% for Advanced Studies, forthcoming 1992).}  The Greek font used is
% that prepared by Silvio Levy\index{Levy, Silvio} and described in {\em
% TUGboat}.\footnote{{\em TUGboat\/} {\bf 9} (1988), pp.\,20--24.} The
% output of this file is shown in Figure~\ref{periphyseon-out}.
% Note the use of two layers of footnotes to record testimonia and
% manuscript readings respectively.
%
% \begin{figure}[p]
% \includegraphics{periph4}
% \vspace*{\textheight}                       ^^A supply artwork
% \vspace*{-3\baselineskip}
% \caption{Output of the {\em Periphyseon, Liber IV}.}
% \label{periphyseon-out}
% \end{figure}
%
% The following "EDMAC" customizations are loaded initially, as
% file "slhh.tex":
%
% \medskip
% \hrule
% \medskip
% \begin{small}
% \begin{verbatim}
% \overfullrule0 pt
% \hsize=25pc
% \vsize=44pc
% \lefthyphenmin=3
% %\overfullrule=0pt
% \input greekmac
% \greekdelims
% \input edmac.doc
% \makeatletter
% \newbox\lp@rbox
% % We need an addition to \no@expands since the \active $ in greekmac
% % causes problems:
% \def\morenoexpands{\let$=0}
%
% \def\ffootnote#1{%
%   \ifnumberedpar@
%     \xright@appenditem{\noexpand\vffootnote{f}{{\@nums}{\@tag}{#1}}}%
%                                                 \to\inserts@list
%     \global\advance\insert@count by 1
% %  \else         %% may be used only in numbered text
% %    \vffootnote{f}{{0|0|0|0|0|0|0}{}{#1}}%
%   \fi\ignorespaces}
% \def\gfootnote#1{%
%   \ifnumberedpar@
%     \xright@appenditem{\noexpand\vgfootnote{g}{#1}}%
%                                                 \to\inserts@list
%     \global\advance\insert@count by 1
% %  \else         %% may be used only in numbered text
% %    \vgfootnote{g}{#1}%
%   \fi\ignorespaces}
% \def\raggedleft{\leftskip\z@% This is a hack; doubtless there are better ways.
%    plus5em\spaceskip.3333em\xspaceskip.5em\parfillskip\z@\relax}
% \def\setlp@rbox#1#2#3{%
%   {\parindent\z@\hsize=2.5cm\raggedleft\eightpoint
%   \baselineskip 9pt%
%   \global\setbox\lp@rbox=\vbox to\z@{\vss#3}}}
% \def\vffootnote#1#2{\setlp@rbox#2}
% \def\vgfootnote#1#2{\def\rd@ta{#2}}
% \def\do@line{%
%  {\vbadness=10000 \splittopskip=0pt
%  \gdef\rd@ta{}% for right margin paragraph->always a few characters
%  \global\setbox\one@line=\vsplit\raw@text to\baselineskip}%
%  \unvbox\one@line \global\setbox\one@line=\lastbox
%  \getline@num
% \hbox to\hsize{\affixline@num\add@inserts\hbox to\z@% inserts added here so
%   {\hss\box\lp@rbox\kern\linenumsep}%                 that margin pars are
%    \hfil\hbox to\wd\one@line{\new@line\unhbox\one@line%   included.
%       \hbox to\z@{\kern\linenumsep\notenumfont\rd@ta\hss}}}%
%  \add@penalties} % margin pars also included in line format
% \def\affixline@num{%
%   \ifsublines@
%     \@tempcntb=\subline@num
%     \ifnum\subline@num>\firstsublinenum
%       \@tempcnta=\subline@num
%       \advance\@tempcnta by-\firstsublinenum
%       \divide\@tempcnta by\sublinenumincrement
%       \multiply\@tempcnta by\sublinenumincrement
%       \advance\@tempcnta by\firstsublinenum
%     \else
%       \@tempcnta=\firstsublinenum
%     \fi
%     %
%     \ifcase\sub@lock
%       \or
%         \ifnum\sublock@disp=1
%            \@tempcntb=0 \@tempcnta=1
%         \fi
%       \or
%         \ifnum\sublock@disp=2 \else
%            \@tempcntb=0 \@tempcnta=1
%         \fi
%       \or
%         \ifnum\sublock@disp=0
%            \@tempcntb=0 \@tempcnta=1
%         \fi
%     \fi
%   \else
%     \@tempcntb=\line@num
%     \ifnum\line@num>\firstlinenum
%        \@tempcnta=\line@num
%        \advance\@tempcnta by-\firstlinenum
%        \divide\@tempcnta by\linenumincrement
%        \multiply\@tempcnta by\linenumincrement
%        \advance\@tempcnta by\firstlinenum
%     \else
%        \@tempcnta=\firstlinenum
%     \fi
%     \ifcase\@lock
%        \or
%          \ifnum\lock@disp=1
%             \@tempcntb=0 \@tempcnta=1
%          \fi
%        \or
%          \ifnum\lock@disp=2 \else
%             \@tempcntb=0 \@tempcnta=1
%          \fi
%        \or
%          \ifnum\lock@disp=0
%             \@tempcntb=0 \@tempcnta=1
%          \fi
%     \fi
%   \fi
%   %
%   \ifnum\@tempcnta=\@tempcntb
%     \@tempcntb=\line@margin
%     \ifnum\@tempcntb>1
%       \advance\@tempcntb by\page@num
%     \fi
%     \ifodd\@tempcntb
% %      #1\rlap{{\rightlinenum}}%
%        \xdef\rd@ta{\the\line@num}%
%     \else
%       \llap{{\leftlinenum}}%#1%
%     \fi
%   \else
%     %#1%
%   \fi
%   \ifcase\@lock
%   \or
%     \global\@lock=2
%   \or \or
%     \global\@lock=0
%   \fi
%   \ifcase\sub@lock
%   \or
%     \global\sub@lock=2
%   \or \or
%     \global\sub@lock=0
%   \fi}
% %
% % We want to include a small Greek font in the definition
% % of \eightpoint:
% \let\oldeightpoint=\eightpoint
% \font\eightgr=grreg8
% \def\eightpoint{\oldeightpoint\let\tengr=\eightgr}
% \output{\advancepageno\edmac@output} % even page numbers
% \lineation{page}
% \linenummargin{right}
% \footparagraph{A}
% \footparagraph{B}
% \let\notenumfont=\eightrm
% \let\notetextfont=\eightpoint
% \let\Afootnoterule=\relax
% \count\Afootins=825
% \count\Bfootins=825
% \def\Aparafootfmt#1#2#3{%
%   \normal@pars\eightpoint
%   \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus1fil
%   \notenumfont\printlines#1|\enspace
% %      \lemmafont#1|#2\enskip
%   \notetextfont
%   #3\penalty-10\hskip 1em plus 4em minus.4em\relax}
% \def\Bparafootfmt#1#2#3{%
%   \normal@pars\eightpoint
%   \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus1fil
%   \notenumfont\printlines#1|\enspace
%   \select@lemmafont#1|#2\rbracket\enskip
%   \notetextfont
%   #3\penalty-10\hskip 1em plus 4em minus.4em\relax }
% \makeatother
% \let\Afootfmt=\Aparafootfmt
% \let\Bfootfmt=\Bparafootfmt
% \def\lemmafont#1|#2|#3|#4|#5|#6|#7|{\eightpoint}
% \headline={\hfil\tenit Periphyseon, Liber IV\hfil}
% \voffset=1in
% \hoffset=1in
% \parindent=1em
% \def\lmarpar#1{\text{}\ffootnote{#1}/}
% \def\rmarpar#1{\text{}\gfootnote{#1}/}
% \emergencystretch40pt
% \cropsetup{24.5cm}{15.5cm}{1.5cm}{2.1cm}
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{small}
% \medskip
% \hrule
% \medskip
%
% The file "periph4.tex" then inputs the above definitions, and
% proceeds with the main text:
%
% \medskip
% \hrule
% \medskip
% \begin{small}
% \begin{verbatim}
% \input slhh
%
% \beginnumbering
% \pstart
% \rmarpar{741C}
% \noindent \text{Incipit Quartus $PERIFUSEWN$}%
% \lemma{incipit\ .~.~.\ $PERIFUSEWN$}\Bfootnote{{\it om.\ R},
% incipit quartus {\it M}}/
% \pend
% \medskip
%
% \pstart
% \noindent \text{NVTRITOR}\lemma{$ANAKEFALIOSIS$}\Bfootnote{{\it
% FJP, lege\/} $<anakefala'iwsis$}/.\lmarpar{$ANAKEFALIOSIS$
% NATVRARVM} Prima nostrae
% \text{Physiologiae}\lemma{physiologiae}\Bfootnote{phisiologiae
% {\it P}, physeologiae {\it R}}/ intentio praecipuaque mat\-e\-ria
% erat \text{quod}\Bfootnote{{\it p}.\ natura {\it transp.\ MR}}/
% \text{$UPEROUSIADES$}\Bfootnote{{\it codd.\ Vtrum\/}
% $<uperousi'wdhs$ (hoc est superessentialis) natura {\it cum Gale
% (p.160) an\/} $<uperousi'oths$ (hoc est superessentialis natura)
% {\it cum Floss (PL 122,741C) intelligendum sit, ambigitur}}/ (hoc
% est superessentialis) natura sit causa creatrix existentium et
% non existentium omnium, a nullo creata, unum principium, una
% origo, unus et uniuersalis uniuersorum fons, a nullo manans, dum
% ab eo manant omnia, trinitas coessentialis in tribus substantiis,
% $ANARQOS$ (hoc est sine principio), principium et finis, una
% bonitas, deus unus, \text{$OMOUSIOS$}\Bfootnote{{\it codd.,
% lege\/} $<omoo'usios$}/ \text{et}\lemma{{\bf et}}\Bfootnote{{\it
% R}\math^{\rm 1}\math, {\it om.\ R}\math^{\rm 0}\math}/
% $UPEROUSIOS$ (id est coessentialis et superessentialis). Et, ut
% ait sanctus Epifanius, episcopus Constantiae Cypri, in
% \text{$AGKURATW$}\Bfootnote{anchurato {\it MR}}/ sermone \text{de
% fide}\Bfootnote{Glo\math\langle\math ssa\math\rangle\math: Ita
% enim uocatur sermo eius de fide $AGKURATOS$, id est procuratus
% {\it mg.\ add.\ FJP}}/: {\it Tria sancta, tria consancta, tria
% \text{agentia}\Bfootnote{actiua {\it MR}}/, tria coagentia, tria
% \text{formantia}\Bfootnote{formatiua {\it MR}}/, tria
% conformantia, tria \text{operantia}\Bfootnote{operatiua {\it
% MR}}/, tria cooperantia, tria subsistentia, tria}\rmarpar{742C}
% {\it consubsistentia sibi inuicem coexistentia. Trinitas haec
% sancta uocatur: tria existentia, una consonantia, una deitas
% \text{eiusdem}\Bfootnote{eiusdemque {\it M}}/ essentiae,
% \text{eiusdem uirtutis, eiusdem
% \text{subsistentiae}{\Bfootnote{substantiae {\it R}}}/}%
% \Bfootnote{{\it om.\ M}}/, similia \text{similiter}\Bfootnote{ex
% simili {\it MR}}/ aequalitatem gratiae operantur patris et filii
% et sancti spiritus. Quomodo autem \text{sunt}\Bfootnote{{\it om.\
% M}}/, ipsis relinquitur docere: \text{`Nemo enim nouit patrem
% nisi filius, neque filium nisi pater, et cuicumque filius
% reuelauerit'}\Afootnote{Matth.\ 11, 27}/; reuelatur autem per
% spiritum sanctum. Non ergo haec tria existentia aut ex ipso aut
% per ipsum aut ad ipsum in unoquoque digne intelliguntur,
% \math\mid\! R, 264^{\rm r}\!\mid\math\ sicut ipsa reuelant:\/}
% $FWS, PUR, PNEUMA$ \text{(hoc est lux, ignis,
% spiritus)}\Afootnote{EPIPHANIVS, {\it Ancoratus\/} 67; PG~43,
% 137C--140A; GCS 25, p.~82, 2--12}/.
% \pend
%
% \pstart
% Haec, ut dixi, ab Epifanio tradita, ut quisquis interrogatus quae
% tria et quid unum in sancta trinitate debeat credere, sana fide
% \math\!\mid J, 1^{\rm v}\!\mid\math\ respondere ualeat, aut ad
% fidem accedens\rmarpar{743A} sic erudiatur. Et mihi uidetur
% spiritum pro calore posuisse, quasi dixisset in similitudine:
% lux, ignis, calor. Haec enim tria unius essentiae sunt. Sed cur
% lucem primo dixit, non est mirum. Nam et pater lux est et ignis
% et calor; et filius est lux, ignis, calor; et \text{spiritus
% sanctus}\Bfootnote{sanctus spiritus {\it R}}/ lux, ignis, calor.
% Illuminat enim pater, illuminat filius, illuminat spiritus
% sanctus: ex ipsis enim omnis scientia et sapientia donatur.
% \pend
% \endnumbering
% \bye
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{small}
% \medskip
% \hrule
%
% \subsection{Arabic text edition}
% Recent developments in Klaus Lagally's\index{Lagally, Klaus} Arab\TeX\
% package have meant that
% now Arab\TeX\ and "EDMAC" can work smoothly together.\footnote{These
% changes are available in versions of Arab\TeX\ from 2.08,
% March/April 1993\@. The Arab\TeX\ system is available from its author's
% institution (by anonymous "ftp" from
% "<URL ftp://ifi.informatik.uni-stuttgart.de/pub/arabtex/>"
% and from many other network sites.}  This will
% be welcome news indeed to all frustrated editors of Arabic texts!
%
% As a taster, Klaus has kindly supplied Figure \ref{arabtex}, a test page
% which shows off the joint capabilities of Arab\TeX\ and "EDMAC".
%
% \begin{figure}[p]
% \includegraphics{arabic}
% \vspace*{\textheight}                       ^^A supply artwork
% \vspace*{-3\baselineskip}
% \caption{Arabic edition of some instructions for using a post office.}
% \label{arabtex}
% \end{figure}
%
% \subsection{Sanskrit text edition}
% Finally, Figure \ref{vyadi} shows an example from an edition of a
% Sanskrit text on P\=a\d ninian grammar that uses Frans
% Velthuis's\index{Velthuis, Frans} excellent Devan\=agar\=\i\
% font.\footnote{Now published as Dominik Wujastyk, {\em Metarules
% of P\=a\d{n}inian Grammar: The {\em
% Vy\=a\d{d}\=\i ya\-paribh\=a\d{s}\=a\-v\d{r}tti\/}
% critically edited with translation and commentary\/} 2 vols.\
% (Groningen: Forsten, 1993).}
%
%    I have not shown the input file for this because I almost
% never looked at it myself.  The edition records a large number of
% variants, and there are frequent font and script changes.
% Preparing this purely manually would have been very error-prone.
% In fact, the text was prepared using a word processor (XyWrite
% III+) which had the ability to fold footnotes out of sight. I
% designed custom Indic fonts for my computer screen, so that I
% could see all the diacritical marks on accented characters as I
% typed.
%
% \begin{figure}[p]
% \includegraphics{sanskrit}
% \vspace*{\textheight}                       ^^A supply artwork
% \vspace*{-3\baselineskip}
% \caption{Sanskrit edition of a grammatical text.}
% \label{vyadi}
% \end{figure}
%
% Font changes were invoked visually using the standard
% facilities of the word processor, so the perennial ``missing
% closing brace'' hardly ever arose.  A short text filter
% program changed the word processor file into correctly tagged
% "EDMAC" input, and another filter program (provided by
% Velthuis) did some special processing on the Devan\=agar\=\i\
% strings.  This combination of tools proved very workable and no
% major problems were encountered.
%
% The following "EDMAC" customizations are typical of the sort
% of changes needed to use Sanskrit with the Devan\=agar\=\i\ font:
%
% \medskip
% \hrule
% \medskip
% \begin{small}
% \label{fam-fiddle}
% \begin{verbatim}
% @dolmode3    % for the Devanagari pre-processor
% \input dnmacs.tex   % special macros for Devanagari font
% \input edmac.doc
% %
% \makeatletter
% %
% \def\notefontsetup{\eightpoint\dnsmall\dn}
% \footparagraph{A}
% \firstlinenum=1
% \def\variant#1#2{\text{#1}\Afootnote{#2}/}
% %
% % Now we set up \select@lemmafont to recognize Sanskrit:
% %
% \newfam\skt % \fam 8 (plain.tex defines 0--7; TeXbook p.351.)
% \def\san{\fam\skt \dn}
% \def\select@lemmafont#1|#2|#3|#4|#5|#6|#7|{%
%    \ifcase#7
%       \rm \or \rm \or \rm \or \rm           % fams 0--3
%           \or \it \or \sl \or \bf \or \tt   % fams 4--7
%           \or \san                          % Devanagari for \fam 8
%           \else \rm
%    \fi}
% %
% \makeatother
% %
% % And then the text:
% $   % for the Devanagari pre-processor
% \beginnumbering
% \san
% \autopar
%
% aasiidraajaa \variant{nalo}{ki.mcidanyat ka, kha} naama
%   viirasenasuto balii|
%
% \endnumbering
% $   % for the Devanagari pre-processor
% \bye
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{small}
% \medskip
% \hrule
% \medskip
%
% \label{multinotes}
% You may have noticed that in the apparatus of the Sanskrit edition shown
% in figure~\ref{vyadi}, the line numbers are printed only once, even if
% there are several variants on a line.  Multiple notes to the same line
% are separated by a $\parallel$ sign.  We mentioned on
% p.\,\pageref{parallel} above how, in principle, this could be done. Here
% is the modified version of "\printlines" that actually does it (the
% original is on p.\,\pageref{printlines} above).
%
% \medskip
% \hrule
% \medskip
% \begin{small}
% \begin{verbatim}
% % First, define the symbol that will print instead of a repeated line
% % number:
% %
% \def\notenumsep{$\parallel$}
% %
% % Now the macro which prints the line numbers for a note.
% % It is modified here so that notes to the same line do not repeat
% % the line number, but print a "||" instead.
% %
% % Just a reminder that the seven parameters of the
% % argument are the line numbers as stored in "\@nums":
% % #1 the starting page,
% % #2 line, and
% % #3 subline numbers, followed by the
% % #4 ending page,
% % #5 line, and
% % #6 subline numbers, and then the
% % #7 font-family number for the lemma.
% %
% % Although there's no counter for the line number, because it's always
% % printed, we define a counter that keeps track of the previously printed
% % line number, so that we can stop line numbers being repeated in the
% % notes if they are all the same.
% %
% \newcount\previous@note@number
% %
% % The beginning of the \printlines macro is just the same as the original
% % defined by EDMAC (q.v. for commentary):
% %
% \def\printlines#1|#2|#3|#4|#5|#6|#7|{\begingroup
%   \@pnum=0 \@dash=0
%   \ifbypage@
%      \ifnum#4=#1 \else
%         \@pnum=1
%         \@dash=1
%      \fi
%   \fi
%   \@elin=\@pnum
%   \ifnum#2=#5 \else
%       \@elin=1
%       \@dash=1
%   \fi
%   \@ssub=0
%   \ifnum#3=0 \else
%       \@ssub=1
%   \fi
%   \@esl=0
%   \ifnum#6=0 \else
%       \ifnum#6=#3
%          \@esl=\@elin
%       \else
%          \@esl=1
%          \@dash=1
%       \fi
%   \fi
% %
% % Here come our modifications.  We're ready to print the various numbers,
% % based on our counter values, but the first thing we do is to compare the
% % current line number (parameter #2) with the last line number to have
% % been printed.  If they are the same, we print the \notenumsep siglum; if
% % not, we go ahead and print the actual line number.  (Note that this does
% % not cope with cases of multiple sub-line numbered notes to the same
% % line; more checks would be needed if that situation were likely to
% % arise.)
%
%   \ifnum\previous@note@number = #2
%     \ifodd\@elin % there is a different ending line number
%     #2%
%     \else
%       \notenumsep
%     \fi
%   \else
%     \ifodd\@pnum #1\fullstop\fi
%   #2% The (starting) line number
%   \fi
%   \ifodd\@ssub \fullstop #3\fi
%   \ifodd\@dash \endashchar\fi
%   \ifodd\@pnum #4\fullstop\fi
%   \ifodd\@elin #5\fi
%   \ifodd\@esl \ifodd\@elin\fullstop\fi #6\fi
% %
% % Now we record the number that has been printed, for comparison
% % next time \printlines is called:
% %
% \global\previous@note@number=#2
% %
% \endgroup}
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{small}
% \medskip
% \hrule
% \medskip
% \Finale
% \endinput
\endinput